JP6876341B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There is a gaming machine that derives a combination of symbols in a novel form in a display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-202279

However, the derivation of the combination of symbols became so novel that it became difficult for the player to understand, and there were cases where the player did not understand the special game production.
In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving both an easy-to-understand variable display game result derivation process and a novel game effect.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine causes the display unit to display the variable display game including a display unit capable of displaying the variable display game, a symbol group composed of a plurality of symbols, and an auxiliary symbol group composed of a plurality of auxiliary symbols. It includes a control unit. The display unit includes a first information display unit that can display information related to the start memory, which is the execution right of the variable display game, by numbers, and a second information display unit that can display information having a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory. .. When the specific symbol displayed at a specific time as a symbol is fluctuating, the control unit sets the auxiliary symbol group to a fluctuating state in which the auxiliary symbol group is fluctuating without including the auxiliary symbol corresponding to the specific symbol.
While making the first information display unit visible in the auxiliary symbol group fluctuation state, the specific symbol is superimposed on the second information display unit and temporarily stopped.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the process of deriving the result of the variable display game that is easy to understand and the novel game effect can be compatible with each other.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch reading process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of fraud & prize winning monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port switch common processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of the 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual processing. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process while opening the big prize opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during opening of a big winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the processing in small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit middle processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit medium processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 3 of the special figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the general drawing game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the Fukuden winning switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the change of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the processing during display of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process in the middle of a normal drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary fluctuation winning apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end processing per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the segment LED editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration control processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the layer structure of the display screen in the display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group auxiliary of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the display screen in the display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the display screen in the display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display switching setting process of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the display screen in the display device of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the display screen in the display device of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the resynchronization processing of the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output channel which the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment has. It is a figure which shows an example of the character voice output by the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output example of the character voice in the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the character voice update process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the output operation of the error sound and the output operation of a character sound effect of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart (No. 2) which shows the output operation of an error sound and the output operation of a character sound effect of the second embodiment. 3 is a timing chart (No. 3) showing an error sound output operation and a character sound effect output operation of the second embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing of the error sound and the error decoration of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the sound output mode of another sound output channel at the time of the error sound output of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the volume update process of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the output operation of the error sound and the output operation of a character sound effect of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect restriction processing of the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the overview of the push button and the cursor SW of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the connection example of the effect control device of 3rd Embodiment, a push button, and a cursor SW. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting state transition accompanying the setting change operation in the setting changeable state (waiting for a customer) of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting state transition accompanying the setting change operation in the setting changeable state (waiting for non-customer) of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the setting change screen in the setting changeable state (waiting for a customer) of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the setting change screen in the setting changeable state (waiting for a customer) of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change screen in the setting changeable state (waiting for non-customer) of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the volume setting and the brightness setting for each error type of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the possibility of duplication with the game sound in the notification sound for each error of 3rd Embodiment, and an example of the list of the notification contents. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the notification display contents for each error of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the error volume determination process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the change timing of the error volume and the game volume at the time of occurrence of a strong error of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the change timing of the error volume and the game volume at the time of the occurrence of a weak error of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the notification cycle of a strong error and a weak error of the third embodiment, and the notification cycle of a lamp output. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the notification cycle of a strong error, the notification cycle of a weak error, and the notification cycle of a lamp output of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the notification cycle of two strong errors of the modification 1 of the third embodiment, and the notification cycle of a lamp output. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the notification cycle of two strong errors of the modification 2 of the third embodiment, and the notification cycle of a lamp output. It is a figure which shows an example of the list which shows the priority order of the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error of 4th Embodiment occurs independently. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output of the door opening error of 4th Embodiment. An example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first) (No. 1) It is a figure which shows. An example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first) (Part 2). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the timing chart which shows the timing of the reception command and the notification operation at the time when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of 4th Embodiment occur in duplicate. An example of a timing chart (No. 4) showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs later) is shown. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the error notification processing of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the error notification release processing of 4th Embodiment. An example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the first modification of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output of the door opening error of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. An example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the third modification of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs later). It is a figure which shows. An example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the third modification of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound output of the door opening error of the modification 4 of the 4th Embodiment. An example of a timing chart showing the reception command, the notification operation, and the timing of enabling / disabling the volume adjustment when the large winning opening illegal winning error and the payout abnormality error of the fifth embodiment are duplicated. It is a figure which shows. An example of a timing chart showing the reception command, the notification operation, and the timing of enabling / disabling the volume adjustment when the large winning opening illegal winning error and the payout abnormality error of the fourth embodiment are duplicated. It is a figure which shows.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine (pachinko machine) 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by output sound (voice) from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, an option setting unit 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the player's operation is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is the display device. The character displayed on the 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and launches the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and the pachinko and pachislot machine 10 is moved to the right gaming region. The game ball launched with the above is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a general drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, the input unit 120 having an input port, the output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like that generate a clock. A predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100. To be operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like for generating and outputting control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the above are provided.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for the solenoid or the display device to output the game machine 10. Take control of the whole. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of a variable display game in a variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal figure variable display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. , The high level is 11V and the low level is 7V, which is connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. When the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor or the switch are detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121. The abnormality detection signal 1 output to is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply unit 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 (changes to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. By doing so, it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. There is.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140, and is a general electric solenoid 37c that opens a large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via a segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via a digit wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 displays images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for the purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A Fe RAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for the purpose are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address bus / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, an effect switch 47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDPReSET signal), the sound source LSI314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311. And put them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55, and then the normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game A random value for jackpot determination is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, for the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). ..

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. Control the door. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. One round is set to open, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure change display game and the second special figure. Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) for the third stop symbol (for example, 1700 ms x 2) 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power release number, and the normal power release time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal figure, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The batch display device 50 displays various statuses depending on the lighting mode of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

By allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 51, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. A general symbol symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, and a state display unit 57 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting modes of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h at the beginning of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that serves as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Next, after performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). From the state of the first input port 122 read earlier, it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16).

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step). S17) If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether or not the checksums of are matched (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). ), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50. The on (lighting) data of the device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, Otherwise, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

On the other hand, when the transition from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined value is set. A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and a timer interrupt signal. It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the winning symbol of the special figure is determined. RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random number to be performed (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number) After saving in the predetermined area of (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. ), The regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter expression update by "+1" or "-1", or a random expression update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step S35 also includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the checksum calculation process of the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S103).

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the initial value random number update process of the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is updated by "+1". (Step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that becomes. The small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the above-mentioned main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S121). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S123) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S124) for controlling the drive of the actuators such as the solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the random number update process 1 (step S126), and the random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( The winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) for performing the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is performed (whether the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S130) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and board radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the input process of the first embodiment.

In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and the switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S150). Step S151), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, the switch reading process (step S153) is performed to end the input process.

As the switches to be monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame open detection switch 63, a main body frame open detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (handled as unused in this process), There are a power failure monitoring signal (handled unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400, a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot-out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. The switches to be monitored by the second input port 123 include a start port 1 switch 36a (“start port 1 winning signal”) and a start port 2 switch 37a (“start port 2 winning signal” and “ordinary electric accessory 1 due to pattern branching”. Also output as "winning signal 1"), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a (related to "ordinary symbol 1") There is a gate passage signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S148, S153) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the switch reading process of the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S161). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area 1 Save (store) in (step S164). After that, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S165).

When the delay time (about 100 μs) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step S169). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S170), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is set as a confirmation bit (step S171).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state as 0 and the bits having different states as 1 in the first and second readings are created (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step S174), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S175). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct judgment may not be made. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S124) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The line output data is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_31 from the LED_00 of the batch display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, a normal symbol display, a normal figure hold display, and There is a status display (game status display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol confirmation number signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". Signal "etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and the launch permission signal output (step S191).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is the process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is the process of transmitting the payout command.

In the payout command transmission process, first, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), each of them is checked. , It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area 2 that stores up to 255 prizes (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed. In this way, the payout command is not sent for each timer interrupt, but is sent after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Overpayment error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). ; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and in step S214, it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 1 of the first embodiment. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). When the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). If the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next big hit symbol random number of the loaded general figure is loaded. The initial value of is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

When the hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). When the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the random number counter corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded hit random number (step S238). It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number region) (step S239). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is corresponded to. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 is both. Is the update target, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is set from "0" to "3". Update within the range (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter for which the value is set is loaded (step S254). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether or not the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). Then, when the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is masked). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the value obtained), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step S258). ), The process proceeds to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number region to be updated is set (2 bytes). Step S260) and step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

In step S262, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step S264), and this value is set to 1 byte. It is saved in the random number area lower than the random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). , The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning port switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table (for example, the port to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is input. Data indicating the number of the signal, the bit position in the port of the signal, and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) to win the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is obtained. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) to be detected is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S275), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S275) is performed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning. Step S276) is executed.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. The number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error status of the gaming machine 10 is to be monitored this time is set to "0". To update in the range of "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S280). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S282). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine status in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285). Then, the gaming machine status check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. It should be noted that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring has a 16 ms cycle.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraud & winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in each winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, "data for determining whether or not there is an input (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of fraudulent monitoring information", and "illegal winning""Lower address of several areas", "Illegal winning error notification command", "Illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence judgments)", "Winning opening switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that the information is defined.

This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. For the large prize opening (special variable prize device 38) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting the game ball, and paying out the prize ball. Besides, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch for which the gaming machine status is monitored is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the game machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S293). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S293). For example, it is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (step S295).

The number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being immediately judged to be fraudulent when a prize is won after passing the mark or when noise is added to the signal. As a result, it is possible to prevent a simple determination of fraudulent even when it is not necessarily fraudulent.

Then, when the number is not equal to or more than the determined number (step S295; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the number of determinations (step S295; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S298), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and the winning number counter update process (step S301) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), this fraud & winning monitoring process ends. As information for which the update of the notification timer is not permitted, there is a large winning opening switch 38a. This is because one big winning opening is monitored with two switches. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer will time up in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer update, the update at the timing of the big winning opening switch that performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. Further, when the notification timer is allowed to be updated as in the large winning opening switch and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 that are to be monitored later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is set to "0". If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to "0".

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is one of the winning opening switches 38a, and when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is the other winning opening switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the state of the gaming machine is the large winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305), and if the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, fraud & winning monitoring End the process. Further, when the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S306), and the illegal prize release flag is prepared as the illegal flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

When the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is set. It is cleared (step S309), and the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310). Further, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S310; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S311). Step S312), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, the fraudulent notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the occurrence of fraud, and the fraudulent prize fraud release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the release of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update processing (steps S278 and S301) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, the information of the "repetition count" and the "data for determining whether or not there is an input" defined for each switch are used. (Monitoring switch bit) ”,“ lower address of the winning number counter area 1 ”and“ lower address of the winning number counter area 2 ”are defined.

In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (Step S322).

If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not the value overflows. (Step S325). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for the winning ball (sending the payout command) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of "0" to "65535". If an overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step S329). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of "0" to "255". If an overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S322). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, a prize ball is set according to the winning.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S286) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of the first embodiment. In addition, in each game machine state monitoring table prepared by the winning port switch / state monitoring process, "lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area" and "port of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored""Lower address of input state area", "Mask data to extract only the bits of the target signal", "Signal on judgment data", "Status off command (in the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to end error notification)", Information of "status on command (meaning of command to start error notification in the case of error system)", "status off monitoring timer comparison value", and "status on monitoring timer comparison value" is defined respectively.

In this gaming machine status check process, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether or not it is in a state indicating an error. Determine (step S342). The case where the signal to be monitored is not on means a normal state in which the error system is not an error, and the touch switch means a non-touched state. Further, the case where the signal to be monitored is on means an error (abnormal, invalid) state for an error system, and a touched state for a touch switch.

In step S342, when the signal is not on (step S342; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S343), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S342; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S346), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S349; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S349; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine status check process is terminated. When the value of the target status monitoring timer becomes equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). ), The prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S355).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the state prepared above is turned off. The effect command setting process for transmitting either the command or the status on command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine status check process is completed.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of the first embodiment.

In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361), and if the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the off-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

In step S361, when the payout busy signal is on (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

Next, the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). When the value in the busy signal state region and the current signal state match (step S366; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369). It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). Further, when the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the current signal do not match (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state region (step S366; N). Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), this payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or higher than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). , The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S129) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set. In the special figure game process, first, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted. This is performed, and the game result is preliminarily determined based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a (large winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has been up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure for setting information necessary for processing, etc. The normal processing (step A8) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but if it is the final round. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) is performed to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, set the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit medium processing. Perform the small hit fanfare process (step A15) to set the necessary information.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", set the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, and set the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A16) to be performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to see if the starting port 1 is won. Whether or not it is determined (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A104). .. The determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is being supported by the electric power, and does not include the high or low of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when the starting port 1 is won during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in operation. When it is determined whether or not the device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 Move to the processing of and perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a general electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), a special figure is provided. The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A121), and the start is started. Of the port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36) and the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed. ..

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a special figure start port switch common process of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes through step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value ( Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by "+1" ( Step A136), the start opening winning flag to be monitored is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A138). Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the starting port 1 is not won (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the starting port 1 has been won (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of RWM is extracted. Save to the storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.

Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It is a starting prize storage means that stores a predetermined number up to a predetermined number as a starting memory that is the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 1 (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage up to a predetermined number, and starts. Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, the start opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A151).

If it is determined in step A151 that the starting port 1 is not a prize (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the starting port 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure holding time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A152, when it is determined that the special figure time is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not being hit or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the starting port 1 has not been won (step A158; N), the stop symbol information for the outlier is set (step A163), the process proceeds to step A164, and thereafter. Perform the processing of.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the starting port 1 has won a prize (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A159) for determining the above is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is provided. It is acquired (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process (step A165) is performed. Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A169) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is directed and controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state (step A201). If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A205, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the processing for the remaining balls of the large winning opening is being performed (step A202).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is not in progress (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the processing is in progress during the small hit (in the small hit game state) (step A203).

If the small hit middle process is in progress (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204).

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

Since the value of the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game is checked by checking the value of the special figure game processing number. Can be checked. Therefore, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to determine whether or not the large winning opening is being processed, the large winning opening remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, and the small hit remaining ball is being processed. Do it.

Then, "0" is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the large winning opening switch monitoring process this time (step A205), and is there an input to the large winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

If there is no input to the grand prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to ". +1 ”update (step A209).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210), and if there is no input in the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. Subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), the effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to "". +1 ”update (step A213).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), and when the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215), and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215). In step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216), and when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; At Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (“1” or “2”) is added to the number of large winning openings (step A217), and the number of large winning openings is increased. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the processing during the small hit is in progress (step A221).

If the small hit process is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. When the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the value of the end of the small hit opening operation is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not been started. (Step A311; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), the effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. .. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

Further, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A303), and the effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed.

Further, in step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A308), and the effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A322).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 is completed. To do.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A307) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special figure 1 Figure The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 30 for the second start memory. It is done as.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure 2 Figure The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A352). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A353), and the information of the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A354). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A355) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined (step SA356).

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A373). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. Whether or not it is determined (step SA375).

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process, jackpot flag 1 setting process, and jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of order. Therefore, “other than big hit (missing)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state) (step A383). ..

Then, in the case of high probability (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). If the probability is not high (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step). A386).

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or a miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of order. , "Other than big hit (missing)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit determination process of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, the small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit judgment is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit judgment. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is out of order, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value is determined. Judgment (step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is out of order, the outlier is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of holds). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in Special Figure 1, the effect mode of the transition destination is determined to be probabilistic depending on whether or not the game state is probabilistic. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not the mode is probable. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A410; Y), special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and the effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). , The information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (step A431; Y) Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1 hold number) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a dedicated effect mode in which the probability change is confirmed regardless of the jackpot symbol. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and the effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36), and the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game at the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of outliers. Therefore, in cases other than outliers, the number of holdes does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half as a result. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 change start process, and change pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in special figure 2 change start will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the first embodiment.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target variation pattern is obtained. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (step A474), and if it is out of alignment (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed to perform a step. The process shifts to A477 processing, and subsequent processing is performed. If it is not out of alignment (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to the process of step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by "-1" (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1", which is a processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as a processing number (step A511), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A512).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal relating to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as the processing number (step A521), and the process is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A522).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in special figure 2 (the signal during change in special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 2) is completed.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, and the same display time is set for the big hit symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed to end the special figure display process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Processing during special figure display Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A611). Step A612).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation. Further, the signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output is executed in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process transition setting process during display of the special figure is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information in the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Including.

On the other hand, in step A705, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is determined. (Step A706; Y), the test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the round. The number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired. Save in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A717).

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is on when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball, and is turned off when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the information of the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information The flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A727). ) Is performed to determine whether or not the special figure has a high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the small hit is generated. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the player from being aware of the above.

Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation number update process (step A735), the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step). A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation is a different value in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes (rotation speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.). It may be the same value (rotation speed) in any one of the plurality of production modes, or the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes. ) May be.

If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726, A735) in the process during display of the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step A751), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process is performed. To finish.

When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number of times for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A752), and is high. It is determined whether or not the number of probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A753; Y). Step A755). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving (high probability & no time saving, or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727, A736) in the process during display of the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode information check process of the first embodiment.

In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771), and when the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), The production mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed. For example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, etc. Is.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). The process of step A772 serves as a counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.

If the remaining number of rotations of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining number of rotations of the effect is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

The effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A777), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be shifted (the effect mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode transition information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information regarding the next effect mode of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). The process of step A776 is an effect mode execution control means that controls the execution of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) according to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, that is, when the probability state does not change (step A780; Y), the effect mode is performed without transmitting the command to the effect control device 300. The information check process ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), save the prepared probability information command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A781), and set the effect command. The process (step A782) is performed.

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Then, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A785), an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information is checked. End the process.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal relating to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning on one big hit signal (output with a big hit + a small hit) and a signal for turning on four big hit signals (output with a big hit).

Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included.

After that, the information of the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag is set. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). Figure Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation that can be executed in the high probability state. Clear the information in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region that manages the number of display games (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). , Save the non-updated code in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and in order to light the display LED during right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing transition setting processing 1 during the small hit fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare intermediate processing transition setting process 1, first, "7", which is the processing number related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing, is set as the processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one big hit signal (outputs as a big hit + a small hit).

Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process 1 is completed.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A903) is performed.

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value (step A906).

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. After saving (step A907), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed in order to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A908), the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed in order to open the large winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning Mouth opening information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big prize opening information 6 (1-8R is long open, 9-16R is short open), (7) 16R, big prize opening information 7 (1) ~ 4R is set to long opening, and 5 to 16R is set to short opening).

Therefore, in the large winning opening operation judgment table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching judgment value "0" are displayed, and the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching judgment value "16" are displayed in the large winning opening opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16". , The large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing while the big winning opening is open]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, "4", which is the processing number related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening, is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process of opening the large winning opening, first, whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area. Is determined (step A1001).

In the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the ending command is prepared (step). A1009), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is increased. It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

When the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

After that, the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.
[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of RWM. Is determined (step A1101).

In the case of the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the large winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A1111). For example, 1.9s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the jackpot remaining ball processing is completed.

If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value. In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106), and the large winning opening opening information is displayed. If it is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A1106; Y). In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time (for example, 3.6 s) for the rank-down effect is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. , Perform the subsequent processing.

Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, the process number “6” related to the jackpot end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

Then, the signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). .. Then, the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is stored. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information in the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process is completed.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment.

In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. ..

Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The migration information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and the effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.

As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which information on the production mode is further included in either "high probability / with time reduction" or "high probability / without time reduction". In the case of the first embodiment, since the probability change state (so-called ST state) is always reached when the jackpot ends, the probability information commands include "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect". There are "Mode B", "High probability / No time saving / Production mode C", and "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", which are not used in this process, but "Low probability / No time reduction / Production mode A" , "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode B", "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode C".

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and the effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a time saving state occurs after the jackpot ends (step). A1216).

When the time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.
If the time saving state does not occur after the jackpot ends (step A1216; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1217), the effect command setting process (step A1218) is performed, and then the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed to end the jackpot end process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal regarding no time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 2 signal.

Next, the signal relating to the start without the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. It includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure high probability & no time saving flag (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data region (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is completed.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal relating to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning on the jackpot 2 signal. Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.

The signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is then saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. Includes a signal to turn on, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number with the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Special figure High probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1242).

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot includes, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal for turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal for turning off the jackpot 4 signal.

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signals related to the end of the jackpot are a signal for turning off the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, a signal for turning off the signal for hitting the special symbol 1, and a signal for turning off the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 To finish.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare processing during the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle processing, the small hit middle processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.
[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, "8", which is the processing number related to the small hit medium processing, is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information of the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit medium processing transition setting process is terminated.
[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing, first, the small hit medium control pointer is loaded from the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). It is determined whether or not the above is the case (step A1402).

When the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit medium control pointer in the small hit medium control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed. When the value of the loaded small hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is special. Figure It is determined whether or not the probability is high (step A1406). In the determination in step A1406, the probability state is the determination target, and the time saving state is not the determination target.

When the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit medium process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). When the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "0", "2", "4" (step A1411; pointer = 0,2,4), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

When the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

The small hit operation consists of a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent wait time (1500 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait. The time (1500 ms), the subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), the subsequent wait time (1500 ms), the subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). It is a series of operations of a total of 7600 ms consisting of a small hit ending time (100 ms).

In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the first large winning opening opening time elapses, and the value of the control pointer goes through the respective processes corresponding to "0" to "5". The value of the control pointer is "6". In this way, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the four opening operations of the special variable winning device 38. In the small hit operation, the small hit ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 ms, which is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms to the controlled small hit ending time of 100 ms.

During the small hit fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, during the large winning opening opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number "9" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) is performed to end the small hit remaining ball processing.
[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, "10", which is the processing number related to the small hit end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512). ).

Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting process is performed. To finish.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end process, first, the flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step). A1602). When the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

Then, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). ..

If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and the effect command setting process (step A1610) is performed. Perform A1611).

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. In addition, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. When the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and the effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

Then, the flag related to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time saving (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to end the small hit end process.

When the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed to perform small. The hit end process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A1632).

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit signal. Further, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 is performed. finish.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in the above-mentioned special figure game processing subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

As a result, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" as in the production command, but a byte configuration of more than that may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process ends.

By writing the command data (ACTION) to the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives each of these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since the serial communication is performed by using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

In the symbol variation control process, first, the target variation control flag is set and it is checked whether or not the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not it is changing (step A1802). ..

When it is changing (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blinking control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805).

When the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is acquired (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is set to the target symbol. Save to the blinking control timer area (step A1807). The initial value of the blinking control timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the blinking control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is completed. To do.

In step A1802, when it is not changing (step A1802; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1810). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is completed. To do.

Information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game processing. There is.

[Blinking control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blinking control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The blinking control timer initial value is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1, and 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1, and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 160 ms when the normal figure is in the state 1, and 120 ms when the normal figure is in the state 2.

The blinking control timer initial value is not limited to the value of the state 2 although the value of the state 2 is smaller than the value of the state 1. The blinking control timer initial value may be a value in the state 2 larger than the value in the state 1. For example, the initial value of the blinking control timer is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1, 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2, and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1. , 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2, 120 ms when the normal figure is in the state 1, and 160 ms when the normal figure is in the state 2.

Note that the state 2 is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to the state 1, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, it is in the state 2. Equivalent to.

As a result, in the batch display device 50, in addition to the status display unit 57, the game machine 10 is played by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. The status can be displayed.

Further, in the batch display device 50, the gaming machine 10 is replaced with the state display unit 57 by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the first state in the state display unit 57 in the first period, and then displays the second state in the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the gaming state transition (trigger notification) on the state display unit 57 at the time of the gaming state transition from the normal state to the probability fluctuation state. Further, when the gaming state such as the normal state or the probability fluctuation state is a steady state, the gaming machine 10 is in a gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Is notified that is in a steady state (steady state notification). It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to notify the gaming state by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify the gaming state by one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify a more complicated gaming state by combining the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. .. Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies a more complicated gaming state by combining the display modes of the state display unit 57, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. It may be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the gaming progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sorting process of the first embodiment.

In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation group table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, or the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. Is.

In the sorting process, first, the first data of the prepared second half variation group table (selection table), second half variation selection table (selection table), and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0"). ) (Step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). Step A1907), the sorting process is completed. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is displayed. The first specified distribution value is acquired (step A1903).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A1903 is obtained from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process. After subtracting and calculating a new random number value (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A1905; N), the process returns to the process of step A1903 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906).

That is, in step A1903, after acquiring the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random number value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above process is executed in step A1905 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table, any one of the second half fluctuation selection table and the second half Select the variable number or the first half variable number. Then, in step A1905, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1907), and the distribution process is completed. To do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process of the first embodiment.

The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, is the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process a code without distribution (that is, "0")? (Step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A2004). , It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), the process returns to the process of step A2003 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2006). That is, in step A2003, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A2005 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

The above process is executed in step A2005 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table. Then, in step A2005, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game processing (step S130) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal diagram game processing of the first embodiment. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

In this game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and then an input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored (step B2). To do. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. Performs the process of setting the referenced Fuzu game sequence branch table in the register (step B5), and performs the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the Fuzu game process number (step B6) using the table. .. Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed using the game processing number.

In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Perform the usual processing (step B8) to set the information necessary for the purpose. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal electric opening time can be set according to whether or not the time is shortened, or the normal. Performs the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the drawing-performing processing. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "3", the normal drawing hitting process (step) for continuing the normal drawing hitting process or setting the information necessary for performing the normal power remaining ball processing. Perform B11).

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing is performed. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) is performed.

After that, a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display is prepared (step B14), and the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). To end the normal map game processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process is shifted to step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (step B102). Here, the right-handed game state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time reduction (during normal power support). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the process shifts to step B105. When the game is not in the right-handed game state (step B102; N), the left-handed command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the number of reserved figures is acquired, and the number of reserved figures is obtained. Is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) or not (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is changed. Calculate (step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N). , The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the universal power winning switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal-figure winning switch is hit, that is, whether or not the normal-figure fluctuation display game is in the hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. Is determined (step B111). Then, when it is hitting the normal drawing (step B111; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count number of the normal power counter has reached the upper limit, as a process for closing the normal power, the value of the end of operation (for example, "4") is saved by hitting the control pointer area during normal drawing (for example, "4") Step B115), the general figure game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general electric winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the hitting of the normal figure at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B111 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or in step B114. When it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the normal electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of ordinary processing of the first embodiment. In this normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121; Y), it is normal. Figure Normal process Transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal figure normal process is completed. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step B122). , The hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to zero (step B123).

Next, it is determined whether the probability of winning the result in the normal map variation display game is in the high probability of the normal map, that is, the time is shortened (step B124). When the normal figure is not in high probability (step B124; N), the low probability lower limit judgment value is set (step B125), and when the normal figure is in high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit judgment value is set. Set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, "251"). Further, the low probability lower limit judgment value and the high probability lower limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251" and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1"), and the low probability lower limit judgment value and the low probability lower limit judgment value. In comparison, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability becomes larger in the high probability than in the low probability, for example, 0/251 in the low probability and 250/251 in the high probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127), and when the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value. (Step B128). In step B127, when the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), that is. In the case of a miss, the miss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the miss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the miss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Further, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B127; N, step B128; N). Step B132), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols.

Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B137), the free area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 is executed, the ranking of the normal figure holding numbers "2" to "4" that are held after the normal figure holding number "1" is executed. Is carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3 in the random number storage area per normal figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by "1".

Then, the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.
[Usually process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B152). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal figure will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B161). Step B162), the normal map fluctuation time (common to both low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B163). After that, the signal relating to the start of the normal map variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). The signal relating to the start of the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the changing flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B166), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal map changing process is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B171) during the process during display of the map in the above-mentioned process during the change of the map will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during display of the normal map, first, the process number is set to "2" (step B181) as the setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and the process number is set to the normal map game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B183). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). The signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B185), and the normal map display process transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B191), and the information in the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B193; N), the normal figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal figure normal processing is performed, and the normal figure display processing is terminated. The normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. 81. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B194).

Then, the hit start pointer value (any of the control pointers "0", "2", and "4") corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit middle control pointer area (step B195). The normal power release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B197) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B197) in the above-mentioned normal map display process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the intermediate processing transition setting processing per normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B202). After that, the signal relating to the start of the hit of the normal map variation display game (the signal relating to the hit of the normal map variation display game) and the signal relating to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). The signal related to the start of hitting the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the medium signal per normal symbol, and the signal related to the start of normal electric operation is a signal for turning on the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal. Is.

Next, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of prizes in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the number of winnings for the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the winning number area (step B206). Then, the flag defining the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is completed.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hitting process, first, the normal figure hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded normal figure hitting control pointer is the value in the normal figure hitting control pointer upper limit area. It is determined whether or not (the value at the end of winning) has been reached (step B212).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B212; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by "+1" (step B213). , The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) is performed, and the normal process is completed. Further, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal electric operation transition setting is set. The process (step B214) is performed, and the process during normal drawing is completed.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of the first embodiment. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B221).

If the value of the control pointer is either "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B223), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the solenoid opening time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step). B224), the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the processing number in order to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B227), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Next, the operation of the normal electric power in the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary variable winning device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

In the case of the winning symbol 1 in the ordinary variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is composed of the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (500 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms), for a total of 1200 ms. It is a series of operations of. In the case of the winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the lapse of the normal electric power opening time, and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is performed after one opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 2 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal power operation is performed by the normal power display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal power opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent normal power operation. It is a series of operations of a total of 4800 ms, which consists of a normal electric opening time (1700 ms) and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the control pointer value becomes "2" after the first normal power release time elapses, and the control pointer value is controlled through the respective processes corresponding to "2" and "3". The value of the pointer becomes "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 twice.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 3 in the ordinary variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is performed by the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the lapse of the first normal power release time, and the value of the control pointer corresponds to "0", "1", "2", and "3". The value of the control pointer becomes "4" through each process. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 three times.

During the normal figure display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. Further, during the normal electric opening time, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened by the on control of the general electric solenoid 37c.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal figure game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric remaining ball processing of the first embodiment. In this normal power remaining ball processing, the normal power remaining ball processing is completed by performing the normal drawing end processing transition setting process (step B231).

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the end processing transition setting processing (step B231) per normal figure in the above-mentioned ordinary electric remaining ball processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing transition setting processing per normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal figure per end process transition setting process, first, the process number "5" related to the normal figure per end process is set (step B241), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B242). ).

After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B243), and the signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Next, the information in the normal electric count number area for counting the number of prizes won in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B246), and the end process transition setting process for hitting the normal figure is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the end process per normal figure (step B13) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing per normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hit end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed to end the normal figure hit end process.

[Usually process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "0" related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B261), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B262). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). The signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal symbol fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

After that, the flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the Fudaden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the segment LED editing process of the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to driving of the round display unit 51 provided in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the LEDs constituting the status display unit 57, etc. To do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, "1" is added to the blinking control timer to update it (step C11). The blinking control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display is determined (step C12), and when the output is on timing (step C12; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing is set. If not (step C12; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C14). It should be noted that the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display can be determined by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, the blinking cycle of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms.

After that, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved numbers of the normal figure is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table 1 or the number of reserved normal figures display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing the display data of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

For example, the normal figure hold number display table 1 and the normal figure hold number display table 2 have the same value for the normal figure hold numbers "0" to "2", but different values for the normal figure hold numbers "3" and "4". Is. As a result, in the normal figure hold display unit 56, the corresponding LED is turned off when the normal figure hold number is "0", the corresponding LED is turned on when the normal figure hold number is "1", and the normal figure hold number is "3". , "4" realizes the blinking of the corresponding LED.

Next, the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and when the output is on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C18). It should be noted that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C19). It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold display unit 52 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Next, the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display is determined (step C20), and when the output is on timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C22). The determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 2 hold number display table 2, and is saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 also realizes the LED lighting mode in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C25). ..

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C27).
In addition, the game state display table 1 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is during the time saving (during the support of the public train), in other words, whether or not it is one of the game states that is advantageous to the player. A display mode for the display unit 57 to notify is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, "normal" is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, "special time reduction (during normal power support)" is notified.

After that, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is completed.

The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not the game state is another game state that is advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notifying. For example, when the LED_30 in the status display unit 57 is turned off, "normal hit (left hit)" is notified, and when the LED_30 is turned on, "right hit" is notified. It should be noted that the period for notifying "right-handed" includes a period corresponding to a gaming state such as during a big hit, during a small hit, and during normal electric support.

As a result, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game according to the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the special figure 2 hold display unit 58, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the state display unit, which are the display modes to be set by the segment LED editing process. The 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activity will be described. For a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value according to the result of the gaming, a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining the gaming value may be performed. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activity, and detection methods and conditions are required according to each type. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be detected accurately.

In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal condition has occurred even though an abnormal condition leading to fraudulent activity has not occurred, and issuing a notification, etc., causes distrust of the player and is a factor for avoiding the game in the game machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent such false detection of abnormal conditions.

Therefore, the game machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of preventing false detection of an abnormal state, for example, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 that forms a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be paraphrased as a magnet sensor.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. Whether or not it is determined (step C31). When the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, "1" is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed up (step C33).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed up (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), the abnormality is determined. When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region is determined. Determine (step C43).

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time is specified. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet fraud notification timer to update (step C39). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C33; N), the process proceeds to step C39.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraud notification period is over, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been performed from, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step C41). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), the effect command setting process is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. To do.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 that forms a radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave has been detected (step C51). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

Then, a command for illegally notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step C53), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C54), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred only when the panel radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave once.

On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step C51; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0". "1" is subtracted from the timer to update (step C55). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraudulent notification period is over, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been issued from, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step C57), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C58), and prepare the board radio wave fraud. It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value in the radio wave invalid flag area (step C59).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), the effect command setting process is performed (step C61), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, the gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but when magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time, it is determined to be in an abnormal state. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the occurrence as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining an abnormal state when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

In the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected, but a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a non-abnormal state may be detected, and is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. The state in which magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal radio waves is simply set to the state of receiving radio waves, but it is possible to receive radio waves of a strength that is not received in a non-abnormal state or in a non-abnormal state. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of a frequency that does not exist. Further, a state in which a radio wave having an intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave having a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as an abnormality. When setting the threshold value by the magnetic strength, the radio wave strength, and the frequency, the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold value is exceeded, or the control device side sets the threshold value. You may want to monitor if it is exceeded.

From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector Originally, an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state is provided, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time. In some cases, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred, but in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), general electric wave fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or a big prize is awarded. When the mouth fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general power fraud, or grand prize opening fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested. Save to the signal output data area (step C87).

Next, in the external information editing process, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. To do. Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step C91).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is set to the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Is a process to output to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of main prize ball signal output is "0" (step C103).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not "0" (step C103; N), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is updated to "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is displayed. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is the time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106; Y), the process shifts to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C106; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts is transmitted to the outside. It should be noted that, after the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. From the time when the payout condition is satisfied to the time when the payout number of game media is paid out, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

That is, the game control device 100 can output information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the number of game media to be paid out. It serves as an external output means.

However, if the number of prize balls generated is small and the number is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) even if this is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, information on the planned number of game media payouts after the actual payout is completed. May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, "1"), the payout condition is always satisfied until the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information regarding the number of planned game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the game machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the payout number of game media is paid out. It is provided with an external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information regarding the planned number of game media payouts to the outside. It is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on the storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout conditions. The addition means (game control device 100) for adding the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to the established payout conditions to the game medium storage area, and the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area have reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside and the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. It is provided with a subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) for each payout schedule of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and changes from "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16". And keeps "OFF" until the value of the output control timer becomes "0". That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal consisting of a 128 ms “ON” time and a 64 ms “OFF” time.

Unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device confirm the consistency between the payout schedule of the game medium and the payout result of the game medium, and can deal with the illegal payout.

Further, in the winning during the big hit period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to the ball running out or the like and the game medium is paid out after the big hit is completed, the external device may use only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on a prize during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that the external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step C89) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a start port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by "-1" (step C114), and the start port signal is output to the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal (for example, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is completed. When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116; Y), the process shifts to step C117. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C116; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C116; N). Step C118), the start port signal editing process is completed.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is a special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special figure).

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the land function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.
[Step D22A] The control unit executes the power saving control process. The power saving control process is a switching control between a normal control state (non-power saving control state) in which the power consumption of the power saving control target device 3000 is not suppressed and a power saving control state in which the power consumption of the power saving control target device 3000 is suppressed. It is a process to perform.

[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. The frame may be switched at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each of the above processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of voice from speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also responds to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). This is a process that corrects the mode of the effect.

The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D30, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends the effect command to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the amount of the stored data. In the description of the control process, the term "store" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If there is, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit sets the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the reception command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be in the normal range (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT values are the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE values. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (action values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

The determination of whether or not the ACT value is the correct combination is executed including the tooth omission check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, a variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command that commands a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol-based command range. The control unit executes symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. Proceed to D67. The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect.

[Step D67] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the error command range. The control unit executes error command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the error command range (step D68), and receives command analysis processing when the MODE data is not within the error command range. To finish. The error command is a command for notifying the start and end of an error.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. Etc. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Decoration control processing]
Next, the decoration control process will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration control processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D28 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the test mode decoration process. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether a decoration device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine 10 is normally lit with a preset decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration process when the game machine 10 is started in the normal mode.

[Step D72] The control unit executes an error-time decoration process. The control unit executes the error-related decoration process when the effect control device 300 receives the error-related command from the game control device 100, and does not execute the error-time decoration process when the effect control device 300 does not receive the error-related command. The error-time decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for notifying a player or an employee of a game hall that an error has occurred.

[Step D73] The control unit executes the decoration setting process. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the game state. The decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

[Step D74] The control unit executes the event decoration setting process. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a predetermined event when a predetermined event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when the push button 25 is operated.

[Step D75] The control unit executes the decoration pattern control data setting process. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each effect device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. To do. The control unit ends the decoration control process after executing the decoration pattern control data setting process.

[Decoration setting process]
Next, the decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration setting processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

[Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when the game state is "power on", proceeds to step D84 when the game state is "power failure recovery", and proceeds to step D86 when the game state is "waiting for customers". When the game state is "changing", the process proceeds to step D88, when the game state is "symbol stopped", the process proceeds to step D89, when the game state is "fanfare", the process proceeds to step D90, and the game state is "fanfare". If "in the round", the process proceeds to step D91, and if the game state is "ending", the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting. The loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the power-on decoration pattern from the power-on to the game-playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration corresponding to the power-on until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. After setting the power-on decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets the power failure recovery decoration pattern from the recovery from the power failure to the playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration corresponding to the recovery from the power failure until the gaming machine 10 becomes playable. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after setting the power failure recovery decoration pattern.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The control unit executes the customer waiting demo decoration setting process while waiting for customers (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demo in the customer waiting demo decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays the decoration corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration while waiting for the customer. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the customer waiting demo decoration setting process.

[Step D88] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the game state is "changing", that is, the changing display game is being executed. In the changing decoration setting process, the control unit uses a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the changing display game being executed (for example, a rainbow including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display when a jackpot notice is included). Color display) is set. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed while the variable display game is being executed. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the changing decoration setting process.

[Step D89] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped when the game state is "stopped symbol", that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is stopped in the symbol stop decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the identification symbol is stopped while the identification symbol is stopped. The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped, and then ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D90] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during fanfare when the game state is "during fanfare", that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the fanfare medium decoration setting process. .. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit during the fanfare. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during fanfare. The gaming machine 10 displays the decoration with the decoration pattern set in the fanfare middle decoration setting process until the jackpot state is started.

[Step D91] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during the round when the game state is "during the round", that is, when each round in the jackpot state is executed. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the round is in progress in the decoration setting process during the round. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the round is in progress during the round. The control unit finishes the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the round.

[Step D92] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during the ending when the game state is "ending", that is, the ending process indicating that the jackpot state has ended is executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the ending is in progress. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the ending is in progress during the ending. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the ending.

Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the first embodiment.
The display screen 700 is the display content of the display device 41. The display screen 700 includes three sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 704, a special figure 2 hold number display 705, a hold display 706, and a hold digestion display 707.

The three sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 701 as the first decorative symbol, a large symbol group auxiliary 702 as the second decorative symbol, and a small symbol group 703 as the third decorative symbol.
The large symbol group 701 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the large symbol group 701 in a large size at a substantially central portion of the display screen 700. The large symbol group 701 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 701 of the display screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the variable display state.

The large symbol group assistance 702 is in charge of assisting the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in a small size on the peripheral edge of the display screen 700. The large symbol group auxiliary 702 cooperates with the large symbol group 701 to continuously and integrally secure the visibility of the symbols. For example, the display device 41 hides the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in the normal state (when the large symbol group 701 can secure the visibility of the symbol), and when the large symbol group 701 cannot secure the visibility of the symbol. Display on. The large symbol group auxiliary 702 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group auxiliary 702 of the display screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the variable display state.

The small symbol group 703 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the small symbol group 703 in a small size on the peripheral edge portion so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 701. The small symbol group 703 independently secures the visibility of the symbols. The small symbol group 703 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 703 of the display screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the variable display state.

In general, the large symbol group 701 is displayed larger than the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703 are displayed smaller than the large symbol group 701, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 704 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 705 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 706 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The number of held storages displayed by the holding display 706 corresponds to the sum of the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 1 holding number display 704 and the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 2 holding number display 705. The hold digestion display 707 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode.

The large symbol group auxiliary 702, the small symbol group 703, the special figure 1 hold number display 704, and the special figure 2 hold number display 705 are also used by the player depending on the operation of the board effect device 44, the game ball that rolls on the front side, or the like. It is displayed at a position that does not enter the blind spot of, and always clearly indicates the variable display state and the number of reserved memories to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and the small symbol group 703 are each composed of three-digit symbols, but the number of digits is any number as long as it includes one or more symbols. May be good. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbols is the same in the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and the small symbol group 703, but the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and the small symbol group 703 The number of digits of the design may be different.

Further, even if the game machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the transparency is changed from 0% to 50%). The transparency of the symbols can be fixed (for example, fixed to 0%) for the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. As a result, the gaming machine 10 secures the visibility of the symbols in cooperation with the large symbol group auxiliary 702 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 701, and makes it easy for the player to grasp the game state. be able to.

Further, even if the game machine 10 changes the hue of the symbol of the large symbol group 701 (for example, from red to blue) during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display, the large symbol group The hue of the symbols can be fixed (for example, fixed to red) for the auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the saturation is changed from 100% to 0%). Also, the saturation of the symbols can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the brightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the brightness is changed from 100% to 10%). The brightness of the symbols can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the size of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the display position of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the display position is changed from the center of the screen to the upper right of the screen). The display position of the symbol can be fixed for the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the design of the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from a rectangle to a circle, or change from a number to a character). Even if there is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703. Further, even if the game machine 10 changes the variable display mode of the large symbol group 701 (for example, from vertical scrolling to horizontal scrolling) during the variable display, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 and the small symbol group 703 The variation display mode of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to the axis rotation variation).

By these, the gaming machine 10 secures the visibility of the symbols in cooperation with the large symbol group auxiliary 702 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 701, and makes it easy for the player to grasp the game state. be able to.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can have different fluctuation modes during the variation display for the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and the small symbol group 703. For example, when the large symbol group 701 is vertically scrolled, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and the small symbol group 703. Further, even if the game machine 10 may update the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and the small symbol group 703, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

Next, the layers constituting the display screen 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a layer configuration of a display screen in the display device of the first embodiment.
The display screen 700 is composed of a large symbol group layer 710, a large symbol group auxiliary layer 711, a small symbol group layer 712, a hold layer 713, a character layer 714, and a background layer 715.

The large symbol group layer 710 is a layer in charge of displaying the large symbol group 701. The large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is a layer in charge of displaying the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and is not displayed in the normal state (a state in which visibility can be ensured in the large symbol group 701 (a state in which all the symbols are displayed)). It becomes a state. The small symbol group layer 712 is a layer in charge of displaying the small symbol group 703. The hold layer 713 is a layer in charge of displaying the special figure 1 hold number display 704, the special figure 2 hold number display 705, the hold display 706, and the hold digestion display 707.

The character layer 714 is a layer in charge of displaying a character (for example, displaying a game effect using a character). The background layer 715 is a layer in charge of displaying the background.

The gaming machine 10 generates a display screen by superimposing each layer. The gaming machine 10 preferentially displays the layer arranged on the front side over the layer arranged on the rear side. The gaming machine 10 controls the display content displayed by each layer, and by switching the display / non-display of each layer, the desired display content is displayed on the display screen configured by superimposing each layer.

The above layer configuration is an example and is not limited to this. For example, the game machine 10 has a hold layer 713 and a small symbol group layer 712, a small symbol group layer 712 and a large symbol group auxiliary layer 711, and a large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 and a large symbol group layer 710. It is also possible to arrange one or a plurality of layers corresponding to the character image and the preview image in between and on the front side of the large symbol group layer 711.

Next, the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group 701 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group of the first embodiment.
The large symbol group 701 is composed of a three-digit symbol of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, and each symbol arranges seven symbols (standard symbols). The standard symbol is represented by a chamfered square frame and numbers in the square frame corresponding to each arrangement. For example, the left symbol of the array "1" is a symbol containing the number "1" in the square frame, and the left symbol of the array "2" is a symbol containing the number "2" in the square frame. In addition, the arranged symbols may be given a predetermined color according to the value of the symbols. For example, the symbols of the numbers "1" and "5" are green symbols, and the symbols of the numbers "2", "4" and "6" are blue symbols, and the numbers "3" The symbol of the number "7" is a red symbol.

Further, the large symbol group 701 can include a dedicated symbol in addition to the standard symbol. In the large symbol group 701, if the symbol array consisting of only the standard symbols is the standard time symbol array, the symbol array in which the dedicated symbol is added to the standard symbol can be the special time symbol array. The large symbol group 701 can switch the standard time symbol arrangement to the special time symbol arrangement, for example, when a predetermined effect or a predetermined result is notified. The special time symbol array includes one or more dedicated symbols, and the number is not limited to one. Further, the special time symbol arrangement is not limited to the symbol arrangement in which the dedicated symbol is added to the standard symbol, and one or more of the standard symbols may be replaced with the dedicated symbol.

For example, in the large symbol group 701, the special time symbol array may be 7 standard symbols and 1 dedicated symbol, 7 standard symbols and 2 dedicated symbols, or 6 standard symbols and 1 dedicated symbol. It may be a symbol, or seven dedicated symbols may be used instead of all the standard symbols.

The dedicated symbol is a display mode that can be distinguished from the standard symbol, and is represented by, for example, a chamfered square frame and characters and figures in the square frame. The dedicated symbol includes, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for notifying the transition to a predetermined gaming state in the variable display game. At this time, the "tiger" notifies the transition to the tiger (tiger) mode (for example, latent probability change), the "pig" notifies the transition to the pig (pig) mode (for example, Fuden support), and the "lion" notifies the lion. Notify the transition to the (lion) mode (for example, probability fluctuation). The dedicated symbol may include, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for notifying a predetermined effect in the variable display game. At this time, "tiger" announces the appearance of a character like a tiger (tiger), "pig" announces the appearance of a character like a pig (pig), and "lion" is a lion (lion). Foretell the production that a character like this will appear.

In addition, the special symbol is a character that informs the reliability of the result (for example, a big hit) derived by the variable display game, for example, "?", "!", "!!", "chance", "super heat", " Includes "correct". At this time, "?" Notifies the jackpot reliability "1%", "!" Notifies the jackpot reliability "10%", and "!!" notifies the jackpot reliability "20%". , "Chance" notifies the jackpot reliability "30%", "Intense heat" notifies the jackpot reliability "90%", and "Probability" notifies the jackpot reliability "100%". In addition, the dedicated symbol includes, for example, "development" and "continuation" as characters for notifying the progress in the variable display game. At this time, "development" notifies the development to super reach, and "continuation" is a pseudo-ream (pseudo fluctuation: fluctuation display of high-speed rotation of the symbol as if one fluctuation display is multiple fluctuation displays. And the temporary stop are repeated alternately.) In addition, the dedicated symbol includes, for example, "hit", "hit 5R", "hit 16R", "time reduction", and "probability change" as characters for notifying the value of the result (hit) derived by the variable display game. At this time, "hit" notifies the hit itself without clearly indicating the magnitude of the value, "hit 5R" informs that it is a hit of the 5R round, and "hit 16R" is a hit of the 16R round. Notify, "time reduction" informs that it is a hit accompanied by time reduction (Public electric support), and "probability change" notifies that it is a hit accompanied by probability fluctuation.

Further, the dedicated symbol includes, for example, "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as characters for notifying the mode change on the display effect. At this time, "mode A" notifies the transition to mode A, "mode B" notifies the transition to mode B, and "mode C" notifies the transition to mode C. In addition, the dedicated symbol includes, for example, "last 10 times" as a character for notifying the number of times a predetermined gaming state such as a normal electric support or a probability fluctuation is continued. At this time, "last 10 times" notifies that the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation is 10 times remaining. In addition, the dedicated symbol includes, for example, "press!" As a character for notifying the game guidance. At this time, "press!" Notifies the reception timing of the pressing operation of the push button 25.

Next, the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement assisted by a large symbol group according to the first embodiment.
The large symbol group auxiliary 702 is composed of a three-digit symbol of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, and each symbol arranges seven symbols (standard symbols). The standard symbol is represented by a chamfered square frame and numbers in the square frame corresponding to each arrangement. For example, the left symbol of the array "1" is a symbol containing the number "1" in the square frame, and the left symbol of the array "2" is a symbol containing the number "2" in the square frame. In addition, the arranged symbols may be given a predetermined color according to the value of the symbols. For example, the symbols of the numbers "1" and "5" are green symbols, and the symbols of the numbers "2", "4" and "6" are blue symbols, and the numbers "3" The symbol of the number "7" is a red symbol.

Next, the display timing (switching timing to the display state) of the large symbol group auxiliary layer, which is normally hidden, will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer of the first embodiment. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of a display screen in the display device of the first embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of a display screen in the display device of the first embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 111 shows an example of the switching timing of the display state / non-display state of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer when the reach display is performed without using the large symbol group 701. The reach display without using the large symbol group 701 is an example of the case where the large symbol group 701 is assisted by using the large symbol group auxiliary 702. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 111, the timing T11 indicates the start time of the variable display, the timing T12 indicates the start time of the reach effect without using the large symbol group, and the timing T13 indicates the end time of the variable display (at the end of the reach effect).

Since the reserved memory is not digested before the timing T11, the gaming machine 10 stops in a state (same number) in which the symbols of the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are synchronized (the same number). In this state, since visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state. Here, a screen display example before the start of digestion of the reserved memory is shown on the display screen 720 of FIG. 112 (1).

The display screen 720 shown in FIG. 112 (1) shows a state in which the left symbol of the large symbol group 701 is "3", the middle symbol is "5", and the right symbol is "7". In this way, on the display screen 720, the gaming machine 10 can make the contents of the symbols grasped by the large symbol group 701 (because the visibility of the symbols can be ensured), so that the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. , Large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. Although the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol is "3", the middle symbol is "5", and the right symbol is "7". It is stopped at.

The gaming machine 10 starts digesting the reserved memory from the timing T11, and starts the synchronous fluctuation between the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702. In this state, since visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state. Here, an example of screen display after the start of digestion of the reserved memory is shown on the display screen 725 of FIG. 112 (2).

The display screen 725 shown in FIG. 112 (2) shows a state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are fluctuating. In this way, on the display screen 725, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed in synchronization with the large symbol group 701.

When the reach occurs at the timing T12, the gaming machine 10 starts a reach effect (for example, a reach effect using a character) without using the large symbol group 701. The gaming machine 10 hides the large symbol group layer 710 when displaying the reach effect without using the large symbol group 701. In this state, since the large symbol group 701 is hidden, visibility cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state, and displays the symbols. Ensure visibility. Here, a screen display example of the transition screen to the reach effect is shown on the display screen 730 of FIG. 112 (3), and a screen display example during the reach effect is shown on the display screen 735 of FIG. 113 (1).

In the display screen 730 shown in FIG. 112 (3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are temporarily stopped at "5", and the middle symbol is fluctuating, that is, the reach with the reach symbol is 5. Indicates the state in which it is occurring. Further, the display screen 730 notifies that the reach has occurred by the reach notification display 731. In this way, on the display screen 730, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group 701, temporarily stops the left symbol and the right symbol at "5", and changes the middle symbol. There is.

The display screen 735 shown in FIG. 113 (1) notifies the reach effect without using the large symbol group 701 by the reach effect display 736. Further, on the display screen 735, the left symbol and the right symbol of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are temporarily stopped at "5", and the middle symbol is fluctuating, that is, the reach with the reach symbol of 5 has occurred. Indicates the state.

In this way, on the display screen 735, the gaming machine 10 hides the large symbol group 701, so that the large symbol group 701 cannot grasp the contents of the symbol (because the visibility of the symbol is not ensured). ), The large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is set to the display state, and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is displayed. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group 701 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group auxiliary 702, temporarily stops the left symbol and the right symbol at "5", and changes the middle symbol. There is.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 with a symbol synchronized with the symbol of the large symbol group 701 even when the visibility of the symbol cannot be ensured in the large symbol group 701 (large symbol). Since the symbols of the group 100 are inherited (the symbols of the large symbol group 701 were displayed immediately before) can be started to be displayed), the symbols can be continuously and integrally displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player continuously and integrally recognize the symbol variation, and can continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state.

The gaming machine 10 ends the reach effect at the timing T13, returns from the reach effect to the normal display state, stops in a state in which the symbols of the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are synchronized, and notifies the stop symbol. .. In this state, since the gaming machine 10 can secure visibility only with the large symbol group 701, the game machine 10 displays the display screen with the large symbol group layer 710 in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the non-display state. Here, a screen display example after the end of the reach effect is shown on the display screen 740 of FIG. 113 (2).

The display screen 740 shown in FIG. 113 (2) shows a state in which the left symbol of the large symbol group 701 is "5", the middle symbol is "4", and the right symbol is "5". In this way, on the display screen 740, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is displayed. .. Although the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol is "5", the middle symbol is "4", and the right symbol is "5". It is stopped at.

In the above, the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is set to the case where the visibility cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the visibility can be further ensured by setting the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state. For example, in the gaming machine 10, by displaying the large symbol group auxiliary 702 together on the display screen 730 of FIG. 112 (3), the reach notification display 731 (other display elements) overlaps with the large symbol group 701. Even when the visibility of the large symbol group 701 can be affected, the visibility of the symbols can be ensured.

Further, when the game machine 10 sets the display mode (transparency, saturation, brightness, symbol size, etc.) of the large symbol group 701 to a display mode different from the preset reference display mode, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 May be combined to prevent a decrease in visibility due to a difference in display mode.

Next, switching between the display state and the non-display state of the large symbol group layer 710 and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display switching setting process of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer of the first embodiment.

The display switching setting process of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). ..

[Step D101] The control unit specifies the effect state after the transition.
[Step D102] The control unit determines the state of the large symbol group layer 710 and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 after the transition based on the specified effect state. For example, a table in which the states of the large symbol group layer 710 and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 are associated with each effect state is stored in advance, and in the effect state after migration based on the table, the large symbol group layer 710 and the table are stored. It is determined whether the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the display state or the non-display state, respectively.

When the control unit determines that the large symbol group layer 710 and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 are in the non-display state in the effect state after the transition, the control unit proceeds to step D103. When the control unit determines that the large symbol group layer 710 is in the non-display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the display state in the effect state after the transition, the control unit proceeds to step D105.

When the control unit determines that the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state in the effect state after the transition, the control unit proceeds to step D107. When the control unit determines that the large symbol group layer 710 and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 are in the display state in the effect state after the transition, the control unit proceeds to step D109.

[Step D103] The control unit sets the large symbol group layer 710 in the hidden state.
[Step D104] The control unit sets the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the non-display state, and ends the display switching setting process.

[Step D105] The control unit sets the large symbol group layer 710 in the hidden state.
[Step D106] The control unit sets the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state, and ends the display switching setting process.

[Step D107] The control unit sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state.
[Step D108] The control unit sets the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the non-display state, and ends the display switching setting process.

[Step D109] The control unit sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state.
[Step D110] The control unit sets the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state, and ends the display switching setting process.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can cooperate with each other by using the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 to continuously and integrally display the symbol variation. As a result, even when the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group 701 (for example, when performing a novel game effect that is significantly different from the normal display), the large symbol group auxiliary 702 improves the visibility of the symbols. Can be secured (compensated). That is, even when the large symbol group 701 is not displayed, the gaming machine 10 can make the player continuously and integrally recognize the symbol variation, and can continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both an easy-to-understand variable display game result derivation process and a novel gaming effect.

[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment, it has been described that the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is synchronized with the large symbol group 701 regardless of whether it is in the display state or the non-display state. On the other hand, in the modified example 1, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is stopped in the non-display state, and when the display state is displayed, the large symbol group 701 takes over the symbol displayed immediately before, so that the large symbol group 701 is immediately before. Start displaying from the design displayed in.

A modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer of the modified example 1 of the first embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 115 shows an example of the switching timing of the display state / non-display state of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer when the reach display is performed without using the large symbol group 701. The timing chart shown in FIG. 115 is a modification of the timing chart shown in FIG. 111. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 115, the timing T21 indicates the start time of the variable display, the timing T22 indicates the start time of the reach effect without using the large symbol group, and the timing T23 indicates the end time of the variable display (at the end of the reach effect).

Since the reserved memory is not digested before the timing T21, the gaming machine 10 stops the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702. In this state, since visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state. Since the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 may be stopped at different stop symbols.

The gaming machine 10 starts digesting the reserved memory from the timing T21, and starts the fluctuation of the large symbol group 701. In this state, since visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state. Since the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are stopped.

When the reach occurs at the timing T22, the gaming machine 10 starts a reach effect (for example, a reach effect using a character) without using the large symbol group 701. The gaming machine 10 hides the large symbol group layer 710 when displaying the reach effect without using the large symbol group 701. In this state, since the large symbol group 701 is hidden, visibility cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state, and displays the symbols. Ensure visibility.

For example, when the left and right symbols of the large symbol group 701 are temporarily stopped at "5" and the middle symbol is fluctuating to the reach effect without using the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group is assisted. The 702 takes over the symbols of the large symbol group 701, temporarily stops the left symbol and the right symbol at "5", and starts the fluctuation in a state where the middle symbol is fluctuating. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group 701 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group auxiliary 702, temporarily stops the left symbol and the right symbol at "5", and changes the middle symbol. There is.

The gaming machine 10 ends the reach effect at the timing T23, returns from the reach effect to the normal display state, stops the symbol variation of the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702, and stops the symbol at the large symbol group 701. Notify. In this state, since the gaming machine 10 can secure visibility only with the large symbol group 701, the game machine 10 displays the display screen with the large symbol group layer 710 in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the non-display state. Although the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the large symbol group 701 displays the large symbol group auxiliary 702 until just before the stop symbol is notified by the large symbol group 701. The large symbol group auxiliary 702 is stopped at the synchronized symbol.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state by synchronizing the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702. In the second modification, the game state can be grasped more continuously and integrally by controlling the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in a limited and asynchronous manner when performing pseudo-variation.

The case of performing pseudo-variation and making it asynchronous in a limited manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the display timing of the large symbol group auxiliary layer of the modification 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the second modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of a display screen in the display device of the second modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of a display screen in the display device of the second modification of the first embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 116 enters the display state / non-display state switching timing of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer when pseudo-variation is performed, and a predetermined game effect (game mode or game zone). An example of the switching timing of the display state / non-display state of the large symbol group layer and the large symbol group auxiliary layer in the case is shown.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 116, the timing T31 indicates the start of the three symbol fluctuations of the large symbol group 701, the timing T32 indicates the temporary stop of some symbols of the large symbol group 701, and the timing T33 indicates the temporary stop of the large symbol group 701. It indicates the start of non-display of some symbols, and the timing T34 indicates the start of temporary stop of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 116, the timing T35 indicates the time when the three symbol fluctuations of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are restarted, the timing T36 indicates the time when the three symbols display of the large symbol group 701 is restarted, and the timing T37 is the large symbol group 701. Indicates when the three symbol fluctuations are resumed. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 116, the timing T38 indicates the time when a part of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 is temporarily stopped, the timing T39 indicates the time when the part of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 is hidden, and the timing T40 indicates. The time when the temporary stop of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 is started is shown. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 116, the timing T41 indicates the time when the three symbols of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are restarted, the timing T42 indicates the time when the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 are not displayed, and the timing T43 indicates the time when the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 are not displayed. The timing T44 indicates the time when the three symbols display of the large symbol group 701 is resumed, and the timing T45 indicates the time when the three symbols fluctuation is resumed.

Since the reserved memory is not digested before the timing T31, the gaming machine 10 stops in a state (same number) in which the symbols of the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are synchronized (the same number). In this state, since visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state. Here, an example of screen display before the start of digestion of the reserved memory is shown on the display screen 745 of FIG. 117 (1).

The display screen 745 shown in FIG. 117 (1) shows a state in which the left symbol of the large symbol group 701 is "3", the middle symbol is "5", and the right symbol is "7". In this way, on the display screen 745, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol is "3", the middle symbol is "5", and the right symbol is "7". It is stopped at.

The gaming machine 10 starts digesting the reserved memory from the timing T31, and starts the synchronous fluctuation between the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702. In this state, since visibility can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is in the non-display state. Here, an example of screen display after the start of digestion of the reserved memory is shown on the display screen 750 of FIG. 117 (2).

The display screen 750 shown in FIG. 117 (2) shows a state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are fluctuating. In this way, on the display screen 750, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed in synchronization with the large symbol group 701. Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops some symbols at the timing T32. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. To do. Here, an example of screen display after a part of the symbol is temporarily stopped is shown in the display screen 755 of FIG. 117 (3).

The display screen 755 shown in FIG. 117 (3) has a state in which the left and right symbols of the large symbol group 701 are temporarily stopped at "5" and the middle symbol is fluctuating, that is, the reach with the reach symbol of 5. Indicates the state in which it is occurring. In this way, on the display screen 755, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, it synchronizes with the large symbol group 701, temporarily stops the left symbol and the right symbol at "5", and changes the middle symbol. There is. Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703 even in this state.

At the timing T33, the gaming machine 10 hides a part of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 (for example, the temporarily stopped symbol), and sets the fluctuating symbol as a dedicated symbol (for example, a dedicated symbol indicating the continuation of the pseudo fluctuation). Instead of "continue"), the production will emphasize the special design. In this state, since some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 are hidden, the visibility of the symbols cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state. A display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state is displayed. Here, an example of screen display after a part of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 is hidden is shown on the display screen 760 of FIG. 117 (4).

In the display screen 760 shown in FIG. 117 (4), one symbol (any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) of the large symbol group 701 is changed in a symbol arrangement including the dedicated symbol "continuation". Indicates the state. Further, on the display screen 760, the left symbol and the right symbol of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are temporarily stopped at "5", and the middle symbol is fluctuating, that is, the reach with the reach symbol of 5 has occurred. Indicates the state.

As described above, on the display screen 760, since the game machine 10 cannot grasp the contents of some of the symbols in the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays only the fluctuating symbol to emphasize the fluctuating symbol, temporarily stops the player with the left symbol at "5", and the middle symbol is the dedicated symbol "continuation". It fluctuates in the symbol arrangement including "", and it is possible to recognize that the symbol on the right is temporarily stopped at "5".

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 with a symbol synchronized with the symbol of the large symbol group 701 even when the visibility of the symbol cannot be ensured in the large symbol group 701 (large symbol). Since the symbols of the group 100 are inherited (the symbols of the large symbol group 701 were displayed immediately before) can be started to be displayed), the symbols can be continuously and integrally displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player continuously and integrally recognize the symbol variation, and can continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player continuously and integrally recognize the symbol variation, and can continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state. Even in this state, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 in a state where some of the symbols are hidden at the timing T34. In this state, since some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 are hidden, the visibility of the symbols cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state. A display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state is displayed. Here, an example of screen display after the three symbols are stopped in the state where some symbols of the large symbol group 701 are not displayed is shown on the display screen 765 of FIG. 118 (1).

On the display screen 765 shown in FIG. 118 (1), one symbol (any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) of the large symbol group 701 is temporarily stopped by the dedicated symbol "continue", and the pseudo fluctuation continues. Indicates a state in which it is confirmed to do. Further, on the display screen 765, the left symbol and the right symbol of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are temporarily stopped at "5", and the middle symbol is fluctuating, that is, the reach with the reach symbol of 5 has occurred. Indicates the state.

In this way, on the display screen 765, since the gaming machine 10 cannot grasp the contents of some of the symbols in the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is set to the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is displayed. To do. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays only one symbol to emphasize the symbol, temporarily stops the player with the left symbol at "5", and temporarily stops the middle symbol with the dedicated symbol "continue". It can be stopped and it can be recognized that the right symbol is temporarily stopped at "5".

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 with a symbol synchronized with the symbol of the large symbol group 701 even when the visibility of the symbol cannot be ensured in the large symbol group 701 (large symbol). Since the symbols of the group 100 are inherited (the symbols of the large symbol group 701 were displayed immediately before) can be started to be displayed), the symbols can be continuously and integrally displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player continuously and integrally recognize the symbol variation, and can continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state. Even in this state, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

The gaming machine 10 restarts the fluctuation of the three symbols by making the large symbol group auxiliary 702 asynchronous with the large symbol group 701 in a state where some of the symbols are hidden at the timing T35. In this state, since some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 are hidden, the visibility of the symbols cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state. A display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state is displayed. Here, a screen display example after resuming the fluctuation of the three symbols of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in the partial symbol non-display state of the large symbol group 701 is shown in the display screen 770 of FIG. 118 (2).

On the display screen 770 of FIG. 118 (2), one symbol (any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) of the large symbol group 701 is temporarily stopped by the dedicated symbol "continue", and the pseudo fluctuation continues. It is confirmed that the display state of the large symbol group 701 is in the process of shifting from the partially non-display state to the three symbol display state. Further, on the display screen 770, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is asynchronous with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fluctuating, that is, the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 are changed by the continuation of the pseudo fluctuation. Indicates a state in which it is clearly stated in advance that the fluctuation of is resumed.

In this way, since the continuation of the pseudo fluctuation is confirmed from the timing T34 to the timing T35 and the contents of the three symbols are already recognized, the gaming machine 10 confirms the continuation of the pseudo fluctuation in the large symbol group 701 on the display screen 770. In the large symbol group auxiliary 702, the resumption of the fluctuation of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 is notified in advance instead of the contents of the three symbols.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player grasp the next gaming state in advance, and can make it easier to understand the result derivation process of the variable display game. Even in this state, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

The gaming machine 10 resumes the display of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 at the timing T36. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. To do. Here, an example of screen display after a part of the symbol is temporarily stopped is shown in the display screen 775 of FIG. 118 (3).

The display screen 775 of FIG. 118 (3) shows a state in which the left symbol of the large symbol group 701 is "5", the middle symbol is "4", and the right symbol is "5". In this way, on the display screen 775, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed. Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703 even in this state. The gaming machine 10 may display the left symbol of the large symbol group 701 as "5", the middle symbol as "continue", and the right symbol as "5".

The gaming machine 10 restarts the fluctuation of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 at the timing T37 from the three symbols displayed at the timing T36. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. To do. Here, an example of screen display after a part of the symbol is temporarily stopped is shown in the display screen 780 of FIG. 118 (4).

The display screen 780 of FIG. 118 (4) shows a state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are fluctuating. In this way, on the display screen 780, since the gaming machine 10 can make the large symbol group 701 grasp the contents of the symbol, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is hidden. To do. Although the game machine 10 does not display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in this state, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed. Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703 even in this state.

At the timing T38, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops a part of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 in the same manner as the timing T32. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. To do.

At timing T39, the gaming machine 10 hides some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 (for example, the temporarily stopped symbol) at timing T39, and sets the fluctuating symbol to a dedicated symbol (for example, tiger mode entry). Instead of the special design "tiger") to be specified, the special design will be emphasized. In this state, since some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 are hidden, the visibility of the symbols cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state. A display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state is displayed.

The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 in a state where some of the symbols are hidden at the timing T40. In this state, since some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 are hidden, the visibility of the symbols cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state. A display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state is displayed. Here, an example of screen display after the three symbols are stopped in the state where some symbols of the large symbol group 701 are not displayed is shown on the display screen 781 of FIG. 119 (1).

On the display screen 781 shown in FIG. 119 (1), one symbol (one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) of the large symbol group 701 temporarily stops at the dedicated symbol "tiger" and enters the tiger mode. Indicates a state in which it is confirmed to be done. Further, on the display screen 781, the left symbol and the right symbol of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 are temporarily stopped at "5", and the middle symbol is fluctuating, that is, the reach with the reach symbol of 5 has occurred. Indicates the state.

As described above, on the display screen 781, since the gaming machine 10 cannot grasp the contents of some of the symbols in the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is set to the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is displayed. To do. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays only one symbol to emphasize the symbol, temporarily stops the player with the left symbol at "5", and temporarily stops the middle symbol with the dedicated symbol "tiger". It can be stopped and it can be recognized that the right symbol is temporarily stopped at "5".

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 with a symbol synchronized with the symbol of the large symbol group 701 even when the visibility of the symbol cannot be ensured in the large symbol group 701 (large symbol). Since the symbols of the group 100 are inherited (the symbols of the large symbol group 701 were displayed immediately before) can be started to be displayed), the symbols can be continuously and integrally displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player continuously and integrally recognize the symbol variation, and can continuously and integrally grasp the gaming state. Even in this state, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

The gaming machine 10 restarts the fluctuation of the three symbols by making the large symbol group auxiliary 702 asynchronous with the large symbol group 701 in a state where some of the symbols are hidden at the timing T41. In this state, since some of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 are hidden, the visibility of the symbols cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group layer 710 to the display state. A display screen with the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state is displayed. Here, a screen display example after resuming the fluctuation of the three symbols of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 in the partial symbol non-display state of the large symbol group 701 is shown in the display screen 782 of FIG. 119 (2).

On the display screen 782 of FIG. 119 (2), one symbol (any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) of the large symbol group 701 temporarily stops at the dedicated symbol "tiger" and enters the tiger mode. It is confirmed that the display state of the large symbol group 701 is in the process of shifting from the partially non-display state to the three symbol non-display state. Further, on the display screen 782, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is asynchronous with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fluctuating, that is, the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 are entered in the tiger mode. Indicates a state in which it is clearly stated in advance that the fluctuation will be resumed.

In this way, since the confirmation of the tiger mode entry from the timing T40 to the timing T41 and the contents of the three symbols have already been recognized, the gaming machine 10 notifies the confirmation of the tiger mode entry in the large symbol group 701 on the display screen 782. However, in the large symbol group auxiliary 702, the resumption of the fluctuation of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 is notified in advance instead of the contents of the three symbols.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player grasp the next gaming state in advance, and can make it easier to understand the result derivation process of the variable display game. Even in this state, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

At the timing T42, the gaming machine 10 hides the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 and displays an image showing the entry into the tiger mode. In this state, since the large symbol group 701 is hidden, the visibility of the symbol cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 hides the large symbol group layer 710 and assists the large symbol group. A display screen with layer 711 in the display state is displayed. Here, a screen display example for displaying an image showing the tiger mode entry in the non-display state of the large symbol group 701 is shown on the display screen 783 of FIG. 119 (3).

The display screen 783 of FIG. 119 (3) shows a state in which the player is clearly shown by the image 784 that the tiger mode is entered. Further, on the display screen 783, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is asynchronous with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fluctuating, that is, the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 are entered in the tiger mode. Indicates a state in which it is clearly stated in advance that the fluctuation will be resumed. Even in this state, the gaming machine 10 changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 703.

The gaming machine 10 resumes displaying a part of the symbols of the large symbol group 701 at the timing T43. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol cannot be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays the display screen with the large symbol group layer 710 in the display state and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 in the display state. .. Here, a screen display example after resuming partial symbol display is shown on the display screen 785 of FIG. 119 (4).

On the display screen 785 of FIG. 119 (4), one symbol (any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) of the large symbol group 701 temporarily stops at the dedicated symbol "tiger" and enters the tiger mode. It is confirmed that the display state of the large symbol group 701 is in the process of shifting from the partially non-display state to the three symbol display state. Further, on the display screen 785, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is asynchronous with the large symbol group 701, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fluctuating, that is, the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 are entered in the tiger mode. Indicates a state in which it is clearly stated in advance that the fluctuation will be resumed.

At the timing T44, the gaming machine 10 resumes the display of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 in the same manner as the timing T36. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. To do.

At the timing T45, the gaming machine 10 resumes the fluctuation of the three symbols of the large symbol group 701 in the same manner as the timing T37. In this state, since the visibility of the symbol can be ensured only by the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen in which the large symbol group layer 710 is displayed and the large symbol group auxiliary layer 711 is hidden. To do.

After that, the gaming machine 10 stops in synchronization with the large symbol group 701 (large symbol group auxiliary 702) and the small symbol group 703 after a predetermined effect, and ends the variable effect.
The gaming machine 10 may display the symbol corresponding to the large symbol group auxiliary 702 when the large symbol group 701 temporarily stops at the dedicated symbol.

For example, the gaming machine 10 includes a symbol of a dedicated symbol in the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 as in the large symbol group 701, and when the dedicated symbol is temporarily stopped in the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 However, the dedicated symbol can also be temporarily stopped (for example, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the medium symbol of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 of the display screen 765 shown in FIG. 118 (1) with the dedicated symbol "continue". Let).

Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 sets in advance a specific eye indicating that the dedicated symbol has been temporarily stopped (for example, the specific eye indicating that the dedicated symbol "continuation" has been temporarily stopped is "123", and the dedicated symbol "tiger". ”Is temporarily stopped as“ 321 ”), and when the dedicated symbol is temporarily stopped in the large symbol group 701, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is made asynchronous with the large symbol group 701. Therefore, the large symbol group auxiliary 702 can be temporarily stopped at a specific eye corresponding to the temporarily stopped dedicated symbol.

Even when the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is temporarily stopped by a dedicated symbol or when the large symbol group auxiliary 702 is temporarily stopped by a specific eye, the gaming machine 10 displays the small symbol group 703 in a variable state, so that the game can be played. It is possible to make the player understand that is continuing.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has described that the small symbol group 703 is changed by three symbols during the pseudo-variation and is synchronized with the small symbol group 703 and the large symbol group 701 (large symbol group auxiliary 702) when stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, when the large symbol group 701 forms a reach during the pseudo-variation, the gaming machine 10 can display the symbols that form the reach in the small symbol group 703 as well. That is, the gaming machine 10 can also use the small symbol group 703 as an auxiliary to the large symbol group 701.

It has been described that the gaming machine 10 hides a part of the large symbol group 701 and displays the large symbol group auxiliary 702 when a part of the symbols is replaced with a dedicated symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the gaming machine 10 may display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 when a part of the large symbol group 701 is hidden even when a part of the symbols is not replaced with the dedicated symbol. In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group auxiliary 702 even when a part of the symbol is not displayed, so that the large symbol group 701 cooperates with the large symbol group auxiliary 702 to display the symbol. Visibility can be ensured.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may display the large symbol group auxiliary 702 when a part of the large symbol group 701 is replaced with a dedicated symbol even when the large symbol group 701 is displaying three symbols. When a special pattern that is not familiar to the player is displayed, the player may not be able to grasp the content of the game. Therefore, even when the three symbols are displayed, when a part of the symbols is replaced with a dedicated symbol, the game machine 10 assists the player in grasping the game content by displaying the large symbol group auxiliary 702. be able to.

In the above example, the description is made using a specific mode in which the dedicated symbol is temporarily stopped to enter, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine 10 has the same contents as the above example even in the case of a specific zone (for example, a zone where pseudo fluctuations are likely to occur or a zone in which reach tilt is executed a plurality of times) in which a dedicated symbol temporarily stops. Can be executed.

Next, a resynchronization process for resynchronizing the large symbol group auxiliary 702, which is limitedly asynchronous, with the large symbol group 701 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the resynchronization process of the second modification of the first embodiment.

The resynchronization process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The resynchronization process is performed after the fluctuations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are resumed.

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not there is a synchronization shift between the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702. When the control unit determines that there is a synchronization shift between the large symbol group 701 and the large symbol group auxiliary 702, the control unit proceeds to step D122, and when it determines that there is no synchronization shift, the control unit ends the resynchronization process.

[Step D122] The control unit specifies the number of symbol arrangements of the large symbol group 701.
[Step D123] The control unit specifies the deviation width.
[Step D124] The control unit sets the rotation speed of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 for resynchronization based on the number of symbol arrangements and the deviation width of the large symbol group 701.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the rotation execution time at the rotation speed of the large symbol group auxiliary 702 for resynchronization based on the number of symbol arrangements and the deviation width of the large symbol group 701, and ends the resynchronization process. ..

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (including the modified examples 1 to 2) has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a display unit (display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game, a symbol group composed of a plurality of symbols (large symbol group 701), and an auxiliary composed of a plurality of auxiliary symbols. It is provided with a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for displaying a variable display game on the display unit including a symbol group (large symbol group auxiliary 702). When the control unit displays the symbol group in the first display state in which all of the plurality of symbols are displayed, the auxiliary symbol group is hidden and the symbol group is displayed in the second display state in which all of the plurality of symbols are not displayed. When this is done, the auxiliary symbol group is displayed.

(2) When displaying the auxiliary symbol group, the control unit of (1) starts to display the information corresponding to the information displayed by the symbol group immediately before displaying the auxiliary symbol group.
(3) The second display state of (1) includes a state in which any of the displayed symbols overlaps with another display element (reach notification 31).

(4) The second display state of (1) is a mode in which the display modes (transparency, hue, saturation, brightness, size of the symbols, etc.) of the displayed plurality of symbols are different from the preset reference display modes. Including state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 2) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a display unit (display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game, a symbol group composed of a plurality of symbols (large symbol group 701), and an auxiliary composed of a plurality of auxiliary symbols. It is provided with a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for displaying a variable display game on the display unit including a symbol group (large symbol group auxiliary 702). When the control unit temporarily stops a plurality of temporarily stopped symbols, the control unit temporarily stops the symbol group, displays the auxiliary symbol group, hides at least one of the symbols, and hides the symbol group. When it is determined that the symbol group is to be re-variated, the auxiliary symbol group is displayed and the auxiliary symbol group is re-variable before the symbol group, and the auxiliary symbol group is hidden and the symbol is hidden. Revariate the group.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 2) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a display unit (display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game, a symbol group composed of a plurality of symbols (large symbol group 701), and an auxiliary composed of a plurality of auxiliary symbols. It is provided with a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for displaying a variable display game on the display unit including a symbol group (large symbol group auxiliary 702). The control unit hides the auxiliary symbol group and changes the symbol group, and hides at least one or more of the symbol groups as a specific symbol (dedicated symbol) that is displayed only at a specific time. The auxiliary symbol group is displayed and the auxiliary symbol group is changed.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the second embodiment will be specifically described. In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 suppresses that the error sound using the character voice overlaps with the character voice notified as a part of the game effect, and the error notification effect is reduced.

First, the outline of the sound output channel used by the gaming machine 10 for sound output will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output channel included in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 has eight sound output channels of CH1 to CH8, and outputs a desired sound by controlling the output content and the output mode to be output from each sound output channel.
“CH1” is a sound output channel in charge of outputting “error sound 1”. The error sound 1 is a sound used for notifying the occurrence of an error that the game cannot be continued. The error that the game cannot be continued is, for example, an error related to fraud. Errors related to fraud include, for example, grand prize opening fraudulent winning error, magnetic error, general electric fraudulent winning error, board radio wave error, frame radio wave error, etc., probabilities caused by fraud by the player (probability of fraudulent game) Is a high error.

“CH2” is a sound output channel that is in charge of outputting “error sound 2”. The error sound 2 is a sound used for notifying the occurrence of an error that allows the game to be continued. An error that allows the game to continue is, for example, an error that is not related to fraud. Errors that are not related to fraud are errors with a low probability (probability of fraudulent game) caused by fraud by the player, such as a shot ball out error and an overflow error.

“CH3” is a sound output channel that is in charge of outputting the “frame sound effect”. The frame sound effect is a sound effect output in connection with various operations performed in the game frame such as ball lending, card acceptance, card ejection, and volume control.

“CH4” is a sound output channel in charge of outputting “board sound effect 1”. The board sound effect 1 is a sound effect that is output in connection with a steady effect such as fluctuation, big hit, and fanfare.
“CH5” is a sound output channel in charge of outputting “board sound effect 2”. The board sound effect 2 is a sound effect that is output in connection with a non-stationary effect (event) such as hold generation and operation effect.

"CH6" is a sound output channel in charge of the output of "BGM1". BGM1 is a sound that flows in accordance with a game production or the like.
"CH7" is a sound output channel in charge of the output of "BGM2". BGM2 is a sound that flows in accordance with a game production or the like. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can give the BGM a wider range than the case where the BGM is output on a plurality of channels (CH6 and CH7) as compared with the case where the BGM is output on one channel.

“CH8” is a sound output channel that is in charge of outputting “character sound effects”. The character sound effect is a sound effect added by using the character's voice (character voice) as a part of the game production.

Next, the character voice that can be output by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example of character voice output by the gaming machine of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 122, the gaming machine 10 uses the character voice to output the error sound 1, the error sound 2, and the character sound effect.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 performs error notification by the character 1 voice or error notification by the character 2 voice as the output of the error sound 1. Further, the gaming machine 10 performs error notification by the character 1 voice or error notification by the character 2 voice as the output of the error sound 2. Further, the game machine 10 outputs the character sound effect 1 by the character 1 voice, the character sound effect 2 by the character 2 voice, or the character sound effect n by silence as the output of the character sound effect.

As described above, the game machine 10 uses the same character (character 1, character 2) as the error sound 1 and the error sound 2 (hereinafter, referred to as an error sound when not distinguished) and the character sound effect. .. Therefore, when the game machine 10 outputs the character sound effect and the error sound of the character sound of the same character at the same timing, the discriminating power of the error notification is lowered due to the collision (interference) between the character sound effect and the error sound. , May reduce the error notification effect.

Next, an example of outputting character voice from the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an output example of character voice in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 123 (1) shows an example of a case where an overflow error is output using the character voice. The gaming machine 10 has a speaker 19a and a speaker 19b, and overflows by outputting a character sound effect "Pull out the ball!" From the speakers 19a and 19b as a character voice (character 1 voice or character 2 voice). The player is notified that an error has occurred.

The display screen 790 shown in FIG. 123 (2-1) is an example of a screen in which a character sound effect for notifying the occurrence of reach is output using the character 1 voice while an overflow error is occurring. Shown.

The display screen 790 includes a large symbol group 791 in a reach state, an error notification display 792 for notifying the occurrence of an overflow error, and a character display 793 displayed as a part of the game effect. The error notification display 792 displays a message regarding the overflow error that occurred, "Please pull out the ball!", And notifies that an overflow error has occurred. The character display 793 displays a character (for example, character 1) according to the game effect.

The display screen 790 is in a reach state in which the left symbol of the large symbol group 791 is temporarily stopped at "3" and the right symbol is temporarily stopped at "3", and a hit occurs when the changing medium symbol is stopped at "3". It shows that. Then, the gaming machine 10 outputs a character sound effect 794 of "chance" with the character 1 voice corresponding to the character display 793, and notifies that the player is in the reach state.

The display screen 800 shown in FIG. 123 (2-2) is an example of a screen in which a character sound effect for notifying the occurrence of reach using the character 2 voice is output while an overflow error is occurring. Shown.

The display screen 800 includes a large symbol group 801 in a reach state, an error notification display 802 for notifying the occurrence of an overflow error, and a character display 803 displayed as a part of the game effect. The error notification display 802 displays a message regarding the overflow error that has occurred, such as "Please pull out the ball!", And notifies that an overflow error has occurred. The character display 803 displays a character (for example, character 2) according to the game effect.

The display screen 800 is in a reach state in which the left symbol of the large symbol group 801 is temporarily stopped at "3" and the right symbol is temporarily stopped at "3", and a hit occurs when the changing medium symbol is stopped at "3". It shows that. Then, the gaming machine 10 outputs a character sound effect 804 called "chance" with the character 2 voice corresponding to the character display 803, and notifies that the player is in the reach state.

Next, a process for preventing the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the character voice update process of the second embodiment.

The character voice update process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the sound control process of step D27 of the main process (FIG. 102). The control unit performs the character voice update process at a predetermined timing during the output timing of the character sound effect and the error sound.

For example, the control unit performs character voice update processing at the output start timing of the character sound effect, the output start timing of the error sound, and the periodic timing during the replacement of the character sound effect with silence.

[Step D131] The control unit determines whether or not the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other.
When the character sound effect is a character voice other than silence and is a character voice of a character different from the character voice of the error sound, or when either the character sound effect or the error sound is not the output timing, the control unit is used. Judge that there is no collision. On the other hand, the control unit determines that the collision occurs when the character sound effect is the character voice of the same character as the character voice of the error sound, or when the character sound effect is in a silent state (replaced with silence).

When the control unit determines that the character sound effect and the error sound collide, the process proceeds to step D132, and when it is determined that the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide, the control unit ends the character sound update process.

[Step D132] The control unit determines whether or not the error sound can be replaced with the character voice of another character. Even if the error sound is replaced with the character voice of another character, the control unit cannot replace the error sound even if it cannot recover from the collision state (for example, when the character sound effect is being replaced with silence). Is determined.

If the control unit determines that the error sound can be replaced with the character voice of another character, the process proceeds to step D133, and if it determines that the error sound cannot be replaced with the character voice of another character, the control unit proceeds to step D133. The process proceeds to step D134.

[Step D133] The control unit replaces the error sound with the character voice of another character, and ends the character voice update process. By replacing the error sound with the character voice of another character in this way, the game machine 10 can prevent the character voice of the character sound effect and the character voice of the error sound from becoming the character voice of the same character. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other, and can suppress the reduction of the error notification effect.

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not the character sound effect can be replaced with the character voice of another character. For example, the control unit determines that it cannot be replaced with the character voice of another character when the game effect becomes inconsistent when the character voice of another character is replaced. When the control unit determines that the character sound effect can be replaced with the character sound of another character, the process proceeds to step D135, and when it is determined that the character sound effect cannot be replaced with the character sound of another character. To step D136.

[Step D135] The control unit replaces the character sound effect with the character voice of another character, and ends the character voice update process. By replacing the character sound effect with the character sound of another character in this way, the game machine 10 can prevent the character sound of the character sound effect and the character sound of the error sound from becoming the character sound of the same character. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other, and can suppress the reduction of the error notification effect.

[Step D136] The control unit replaces the character sound effect with silence (character sound effect n (silence)), and ends the character voice update process. By replacing the character sound effect with silence in this way, the game machine 10 can prevent the character voice of the character sound effect and the character voice of the error sound from becoming the character voice of the same character. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other, and can suppress the reduction of the error notification effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 preferentially replaces the error sound (by considering the replacement of the character sound effect after considering the replacement of the error sound), which causes a contradiction in the game production. Can be deterred. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from feeling distrust.

The gaming machine 10 may preferentially replace the character sound effect and the error sound, whichever is newly started to be output. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the inconsistency from occurring due to the replacement of the character voice.

Since the error sound has nothing to do with the progress of the game, when the game machine 10 replaces the character voice of the error sound with another character voice in the middle of outputting the error sound, the error sound after the replacement starts from the beginning. The error notification may be redone.

Next, a specific example of character voice update will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. 125 is a timing chart showing the output operation of the error sound and the output operation of the character sound effect of the second embodiment. FIG. 126 is a timing chart (No. 2) showing the output operation of the error sound and the output operation of the character sound effect of the second embodiment. FIG. 127 is a timing chart (No. 3) showing an error sound output operation and a character sound effect output operation of the second embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 125 shows an example of a case where the character sound of the error sound is replaced with the character sound of another character so that the error sound and the character sound effect do not collide with each other.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 125, the timing t11 indicates the timing at which the first error occurs and the output of the error sound is started. The timing t12 indicates the timing at which the output of the error sound ends after the first error ends. The timing t13 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is started and the output of the character sound effect is started. The timing t14 indicates the timing at which the output of the error sound is started when the second error occurs. The timing t15 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is finished and the output of the character sound effect is finished. The timing t16 indicates the timing at which the second error ends and the output of the error sound ends.

If the first error sound and the second error sound are not replaced, the error notification is performed by the character voice 1. Further, it is assumed that the error sound can be replaced at the time of the first error and the second error. Further, the character sound effect is assumed to be the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) when the replacement is not performed.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound regarding the first error at the timing t11. Since the character sound effect is not output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide (step D131: NO), so that the game machine 10 starts the error notification by the character sound 1. Then, the gaming machine 10 ends the error notification by the character voice 1 at the timing t12.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect at the timing t13. Since no error sound is output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide (step D131: NO), so that the game machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1).

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound regarding the second error at the timing t14. Since the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) is output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other when the game machine 10 notifies the error by the character sound 1 (step D131: YES). Therefore, the game machine 10 determines whether or not the error sound can be replaced (step D132), determines that the error sound can be replaced (step D132: YES), and outputs the character voice of the error sound. The character voice 1 is replaced with the character voice 2 (step D133), and error notification by the character voice 2 is started.

Then, the gaming machine 10 ends the output of the character sound effect 1 (character voice 1) at the timing t15, and ends the error notification by the character voice 2 at the timing t16.
Next, FIG. 126 will be described. The timing chart shown in FIG. 126 shows an example of a case where the character sound of the character sound effect is replaced with the character sound of another character so that the error sound and the character sound effect do not collide with each other.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 126, the timing t21 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is started and the output of the character sound effect is started. The timing t22 indicates the timing at which the output of the error sound is started when the first error occurs. The timing t23 indicates the timing at which the first error ends and the output of the error sound ends. The timing t24 indicates the timing at which the output of the error sound is started when the second error occurs. The timing t25 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is finished and the output of the character sound effect is finished. The timing t26 indicates the timing at which the second error ends and the output of the error sound ends.

If the first error sound and the second error sound are not replaced, the error notification is performed by the character voice 1. Further, it is assumed that the error sound cannot be replaced at the time of the first error and the second error. Further, the character sound effect is assumed to be the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) when the replacement is not performed. Further, it is assumed that the character sound effect can be replaced during the error notification.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect at the timing t21. Since the character sound effect is not output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide (step D131: NO), so that the game machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1).

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound regarding the first error at the timing t22. Since the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) is output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other when the game machine 10 notifies the error by the character sound 1 (step D131: YES).

Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not the error sound can be replaced (step D132) and determines that the error sound cannot be replaced (step D132: NO), the character sound effect is different. It is determined whether or not the replacement is possible (step D134). Then, the game machine 10 determines that the character sound effect can be replaced (step D134: YES), and the character sound effect being output is the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) which is the sound effect of another character. (Step D134), and the error notification by the character sound 1 is started.

The gaming machine 10 ends the error notification by the character voice 1 at the timing t23.
The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound regarding the second error at the timing t24. Since the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) is output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide with each other even if the error notification is performed by the character sound 1 (step D131: NO). , Starts error notification by character voice 1.

Then, the gaming machine 10 ends the output of the character sound effect 2 (character voice 2) at the timing t25, and ends the error notification by the character voice 1 at the timing t26.
Next, FIG. 127 will be described. The timing chart shown in FIG. 127 shows an example of a case where the character sound of the character sound effect is replaced with silence so that the error sound and the character sound effect do not collide with each other.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 127, the timing t31 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is started and the output of the character sound effect is started. The timing t32 indicates the timing at which an error occurs and the output of the error sound is started. The timing t33 indicates the timing at which the error ends and the output of the error sound ends (the timing at which the afterglow period of the error sound starts). The timing t34 indicates the timing at which the afterglow period of the error sound ends. The timing t35 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is finished and the output of the character sound effect is finished.

The lingering period of the error sound is a period provided after the notification of the error sound is completed (after the output is stopped), and the error sound is notified in the collision determination (step D131) during the period. Is considered. By providing such a lingering period of the error sound, the game machine 10 prevents the character sound effect by the character voice of the character similar to the character of the character voice used in the error sound from being output immediately after the error sound ends. it can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it aware that the notification of the error sound has ended, and can prevent the player from misunderstanding that the error sound continues.

If the error sound is not replaced, the error sound shall be an error notification by the character voice 1. Also, it is assumed that the error sound cannot be replaced. Further, the character sound effect is assumed to be the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) when the replacement is not performed. Further, it is assumed that the character sound effect cannot be replaced during the error notification.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect at the timing t31. Since the character sound effect is not output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide (step D131: NO), so that the game machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1).

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound at the timing t32. Since the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) is output at this timing, the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other when the game machine 10 notifies the error by the character sound 1 (step D131: YES).

Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not the error sound can be replaced (step D132) and determines that the error sound cannot be replaced (step D132: NO), the character sound effect is different. It is determined whether or not the replacement is possible (step D134). Then, the game machine 10 determines that the character sound effect cannot be replaced (step D134: NO), and replaces the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1) being output with the character sound effect n (silence). At the same time (step D136), the error notification by the character voice 1 is started.

The gaming machine 10 ends the error notification by the character voice 1 at the timing t33, and starts the afterglow period of the error sound. During the afterglow period of the error sound (timing t33 to timing t34), since the character sound effect n (silence), the character sound effect and the error sound collide (step D131: YES). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not the error sound can be replaced (step D132) and determines that the error sound cannot be replaced (step D132: NO), the character sound effect is different. It is determined whether or not the replacement is possible (step D134). Since it is the afterglow period of the error sound, the game machine 10 considers that the error notification by the character voice 1 is being performed, determines that the character sound effect cannot be replaced (step D134: NO), and determines that the character sound effect cannot be replaced. Continue to output n (silence).

The gaming machine 10 ends the afterglow period of the error sound at the timing t34. Since the character sound effect n (silence) occurs at the timing t34, the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other (step D131: YES). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 determines whether or not the error sound can be replaced (step D132) and determines that the error sound cannot be replaced (step D132: NO), the character sound effect is different. It is determined whether or not the replacement is possible (step D134). Since the afterglow period of the error sound has ended, the game machine 10 determines that the character sound effect can be replaced (step D134: YES), and sets the character sound effect n (silence) to the character sound effect 1 (character sound 1). (Step D135). Then, the gaming machine 10 ends the output of the character sound effect 1 (character voice 1) at the timing t35.

The method of muting the character sound effect is not limited to the method of replacing the character sound effect with silence. For example, when the game machine 10 has a channel that is not used during the game, that is, a channel that is in a silent state (output stop state) during the game, the sound output channel of the character sound effect is changed from CH8 to the silent state. By switching to the channel and switching the sound output channel of the character sound effect to CH8 again after the lingering period of the error sound elapses, the character sound effect can be silenced during the error notification.

In this case, since the gaming machine 10 only switches the output channel and does not need to replace the data contents, there is a risk that the display effect and the character sound effect may be out of alignment when the character sound effect is output again after the error notification. It can be deterred.

The gaming machine 10 may be provided with a channel dedicated to silence in advance.
Next, the relationship between the notification of the error sound and the notification mode other than the error sound will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a timing chart showing the operation timings of the error sound and the error decoration of the second embodiment.

The timing chart of FIG. 128 shows the relationship between the notification timing of the error sound and the operation timing of the error notification. In the timing chart of FIG. 128, the timing t41 indicates the timing at which an error occurs and the output of the error sound and the error decoration is started. The timing t42 indicates the timing at which the error ends and the output of the error sound ends. The timing t43 indicates the timing at which the output of the error decoration ends.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting the error sound and the error decoration at the timing t41, ends the output of the error sound at the timing t42, and ends the output of the error decoration at the timing t43.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can improve the error notification effect by continuously notifying the error decoration even after the notification of the error sound is completed. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the timing t43 so as to coincide with the end timing of the afterglow period of the error sound.

Next, the relationship with other sound output channels will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing a sound output mode of another sound output channel at the time of error sound output of the second embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 129 shows a sound output mode of another sound output channel at the time of error sound output. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 129, the timing t51 indicates the time when an error occurs, and the timing t52 indicates the time when the error ends.

When an error occurs at the timing t51, the gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound. When the gaming machine 10 starts outputting the error sound, the volume of the board sound effect 1 is suppressed, the volume of the board sound effect 2 is suppressed, the volume of the BGM 1 is suppressed, and the volume of the BGM 2 is suppressed.

Then, when the error ends at the timing t52, the gaming machine 10 ends the output of the error sound. When the game machine 10 ends the output of the error sound, the suppression of the volume of the board sound effect 1 is released, the suppression of the volume of the board sound effect 2 is released, the suppression of the volume of the BGM 1 is released, and the volume of the BGM 2 is reduced. Release the suppression.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can improve the error notification effect by making it easier to hear the error sound by suppressing the volume output from the other sound output channels while the error sound is being output.
In the above embodiment, when the character sound effect and the error sound are the character voices of the same character, one of them is switched to the other character voice, but this is an example and is not limited to this.

For example, when the game machine 10 outputs the same sound (for example, BGM or "pop" sound) as the effect sound (including the character sound effect) related to the game and the error sound, it interferes with one of the output sounds. It is also possible to switch to a sound that does not.

Further, when the game machine 10 outputs a sound having the same system of the effect sound (including the character sound effect) and the error sound (for example, the sound of both female characters) (the effect sound and the error sound have the same system). (When sound is included), one of the output sounds can be switched to a sound that does not interfere.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
In the second embodiment, when the character voices collide, the replacement is performed so that the character voices do not collide. On the other hand, in the first modification, when the character sound effect and the error sound are output at the same timing, the character sound effect is suppressed regardless of whether or not the character sounds collide.

First, the volume update process of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the volume update process of the first modification of the second embodiment.

The character voice update process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the sound control process of step D27 of the main process (FIG. 102). The control unit performs the character voice update process at a predetermined timing during the output timing of the character sound effect.

For example, the control unit performs the character voice update process at the output start timing of the character sound effect, the output start timing of the error sound, and the periodic timing during the suppression of the character sound effect (including the silent replacement).

[Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not an error is occurring (error sound output timing). If the control unit determines that an error has occurred, the process proceeds to step D142, and if it determines that an error has not occurred, the control unit proceeds to step D145.

[Step D142] The control unit suppresses the volume of the character sound effect.
[Step D143] The control unit determines whether or not the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other.

If the character sound effect is a character voice other than silence and is a character voice of a character different from the character voice of the error sound, the control unit determines that there is no collision. On the other hand, the control unit determines that the collision occurs when the character sound effect is the character voice of the same character as the character voice of the error sound, or when the character sound effect is in a silent state.

When the control unit determines that the character sound effect and the error sound collide, the process proceeds to step D144, and when it is determined that the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide, the control unit ends the character sound update process.

[Step D144] The control unit replaces the character sound effect with silence (character sound effect n (silence)), and ends the character voice update process. By replacing the character sound effect with silence in this way, the game machine 10 can prevent the character voice of the character sound effect and the character voice of the error sound from becoming the character voice of the same character. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other, and can suppress the reduction of the error notification effect.

[Step D145] The control unit determines whether or not the character sound effect is being suppressed (including during silence replacement). When the control unit determines that the character sound effect is being suppressed, the process proceeds to step D146, and when it is determined that the character sound effect is not being suppressed, the control unit ends the character voice update process.

[Step D146] The control unit releases the suppression of the volume of the character sound effect and ends the character voice update process. When the character sound effect is replaced with silence, the control unit replaces the character sound effect with the character sound effect before the replacement again.

As described above, the game machine 10 can improve the error notification effect by suppressing the character sound effect so that the error sound can be easily heard even when the character sound effect and the error sound are different character sounds.

Next, a specific example of character voice update will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a timing chart showing an error sound output operation and a character sound effect output operation of the first modification of the second embodiment.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 131 suppresses the volume of the error sound when the error sound and the character sound effect are output at the same timing, and the character sound of the error sound when the error sound and the character sound effect collide with each other. An example of the case where is replaced with silence is shown.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 131, the timing t61 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is started and the output of the character sound effect is started. The timing t62 indicates the timing at which the first error occurs and the output of the error sound is started. The timing t63 indicates the timing at which the first error ends and the output of the error sound ends. The timing t64 indicates the timing at which the output of the error sound is started when the second error occurs. The timing t65 indicates the timing at which the second error ends and the output of the error sound ends. The timing t66 indicates the timing at which the specific effect is finished and the output of the character sound effect is finished.

It is assumed that the first error sound is an error notification by the character voice 1 and the second error sound is an error notification by the character voice 2. Further, the character sound effect is assumed to be the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) when the replacement is not performed.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect at the timing t61. Since no error sound is output at this timing (step D141: NO), the gaming machine 10 starts outputting the character sound effect 2 (character voice 2) at the MAX volume.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound (error notification by the character voice 1) regarding the first error at the timing t62. Since the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) is output at this timing, the game machine 10 outputs an error sound during the output of the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) (step D141). : YES), suppress the volume of the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2). Since the game machine 10 does not collide with the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) and the error notification by the character sound 1 output as an error sound (step D143: NO), the output of the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) is output. continue.

The gaming machine 10 ends the error notification by the character voice 1 at the timing t63. At this timing, no error sound is output (step D141: NO), and the character sound effect is being suppressed (step D145: YES). Therefore, the game machine 10 has the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2). The suppression of the volume of is released, and the output at the MAX volume is restarted.

The gaming machine 10 starts outputting an error sound (error notification by the character voice 2) regarding the second error at the timing t64. At this timing, the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) is output, and an error sound is output during the output of the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) (step D141: YES). 10 suppresses the volume of the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2). Since the game machine 10 collides with the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) and the error notification by the character sound 2 output as an error sound (step D143: YES), the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) is used as the character effect. It is replaced with sound n (silence) (step D144).

The gaming machine 10 ends the error notification by the character voice 2 at the timing t65. At this timing, no error sound is output (step D141: NO), and the character sound effect is being suppressed (silence) (step D145: YES), so that the game machine 10 has the character sound effect n (silence). ) Is replaced with the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) again, and the output of the character sound effect 2 (character sound 2) is restarted. The gaming machine 10 ends the output of the character sound effect 2 (character voice 2) at the timing t66.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
In the second embodiment, when the character sound effect and the error sound collide, the collision is controlled so as to avoid the collision. On the other hand, in the second modification of the second embodiment, when an error occurs, the character sound effect and the error are restricted by limiting the effect of using the same character voice as the character voice in the error sound. Prevents collision with sound.

Specifically, the process of limiting the effect performed to prevent the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect limiting process of the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

The effect restriction process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 104). The control unit performs the effect restriction process every time a reception command is received.

[Step D151] The control unit determines whether or not an error is occurring. If it is determined that an error is occurring, the control unit proceeds to step D152, and if it is determined that no error is occurring, the control unit ends the effect limiting process.

[Step D152] The control unit identifies the character voice in the error sound being notified regarding the error being generated.
[Step D153] The control unit determines whether or not the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other. The control unit determines that the character sound effect and the error sound collide with each other when the character sound used in the effect to be selected based on the received reception command and the character sound in the error sound are of the same character. However, if it is not the same character, it is determined that the character sound effect and the error sound do not collide.

When the control unit determines that the character sound effect and the error sound collide, the process proceeds to step 154, and when it is determined that the character sound effect does not collide, the control unit ends the effect limiting process.
[Step D154] The control unit limits the effect options. For example, the control unit limits the effect options so that an effect using a character sound of a character different from the character sound in the error sound is selected.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the selection of the effect in which the character sound of the same character as the character sound in the error sound is selected by limiting the effect options. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character sound effect and the error sound from colliding with each other, and can suppress the reduction of the error notification effect.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above (including the modified examples 1 to 2) has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b) and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit overlaps the first sound output (effect sound) output in connection with the game effect and the second sound output (error sound 1, error sound 2) output in connection with the error notification. When the first sound output and the second sound output include sound data of the same system, either the first sound output or the second sound output is output. Change to a third sound output that does not interfere with the other.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 2) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b) and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit outputs a first sound output (character effect sound) output in connection with the game production and a second sound output (error sound 1, error sound 2) output in connection with error notification. When overlapping output from the sound output means, the interference between the first sound output and the second sound output is evaluated, and when it is evaluated that the first sound output and the second sound output interfere with each other, the first Change either one of the sound output of the above or the second sound output to the third sound output that does not interfere with the other.

(2) When changing the first sound output to the third sound output, the control unit of (1) changes it to silence as the third sound output.
(3) The control unit of (1) changes the second sound output to the third sound output in preference to the first sound output.

(4) The control unit of (2) ends the output of the second sound output, and after a predetermined period of time elapses, changes from silence to the first sound output.
(5) The control unit of (1) limits the volume of the first sound output when the first sound output and the second sound output overlap with each other and are output from the sound output means as compared with the case where the volume of the first sound output does not overlap.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 2) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b) and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit outputs a first voice output (character sound) output in connection with the game production and a second voice output (error sound 1, error sound 2) output in relation to error notification. In the case of overlapping output from the sound output means, when the first audio output is the audio output corresponding to the specific character and the second audio output is the audio output corresponding to the specific character, the first audio output. Alternatively, one of the second audio outputs is changed to a non-interfering mode that does not interfere with the other.

(2) The control unit of (1) changes either the first voice output or the second voice output to a voice output corresponding to a character different from the specific character.
(3) The control unit of (1) changes the first audio output to silence.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modified example) will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 149. In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the brightness (brightness) and the volume can be set to desired levels by a setting operation by the player. The gaming machine 10 can reflect the brightness setting and the volume setting in the gaming effect, and provides a gaming environment suitable for the player.

First, the push button and the cursor SW (switch) that accept the setting operation by the player in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the push button and the cursor SW according to the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 includes a push button 291 and a cursor SW294 on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. The gaming machine 10 arranges the push button 291 on the left side of the upper edge portion and the cursor SW294 on the right side of the upper edge portion.

The push button 291 includes a push button LED 292 and a push button SW293. The push button 291 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface that becomes the upper surface when the player looks down is substantially circular. The push button SW293 can detect the pressing operation of the push button 291. The push button SW293 functions as the decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG.

The cursor SW294 arranges four switches including an upper button 2941, a lower button 2942, a right button 2944, and a left button 2943 in a cross shape on the top, bottom, left, and right. The cursor SW294 functions as the selection button switch 25a described with reference to FIG.

The push button 291 has nine small circles about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface, one small circle is arranged in the center of the upper surface, and a circumference surrounding the small circle arranged in the center. Place eight small circles on top. In the small circle portion, one system of push button LEDs 292 is arranged within the circumference thereof. The push button LED 292 is a 9-system full-color LED.

Next, the connection between the effect control device 300, the push button 291 and the cursor SW294 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a connection example of the effect control device of the third embodiment, the push button, and the cursor SW.

The effect control device 300 and the push button 291 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs the control signals of the nine systems of the push button LED 292 to the push button 291 and inputs the detection signal of the push button SW293 from the push button 291. Further, the effect control device 300 and the cursor SW294 are electrically connected to each other. The effect control device 300 inputs four detection signals from the cursor SW294.

Next, the setting change operation of the gaming machine 10 will be described. The gaming machine 10 has two setting changeable states (for example, a first setting changeable state and a second setting changeable state), and the setting items and operation methods that can be changed are different in each setting changeable state.

First, the state in which the setting can be changed while waiting for a customer will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a setting state transition accompanying a setting change operation in the setting changeable state (waiting for a customer) of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 has a timing at which it is possible to accept a setting change of a predetermined setting item in a customer waiting state (for example, a first setting changeable state). Even in the waiting state for customers, the gaming machine 10 shifts the gaming state from the waiting state for customers to the variable display state by receiving a variable display command if there is a winning opening, and cannot accept setting changes in the waiting state for customers. To do.

The gaming machine 10 displays the setting window by detecting the pressing of the push button 291. The state in which the setting window is displayed (the setting guidance explicit state) corresponds to the state in which the player is clearly indicated that the setting change operation can be accepted.

The gaming machine 10 accepts a setting change operation by the cursor SW294 for a setting item (explicit setting item) to be specified in the setting window if the setting guidance is specified. For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the upper button on the cursor SW294 and accepts a selection operation for an explicit setting item (for example, character selection, mode selection, etc.). Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the lower button ON of the cursor SW294 and accepts the selection operation for the explicit setting item. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects that the right button on the cursor SW294 is ON, and accepts a selection operation for an explicit setting item. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the left button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the selection operation for the explicit setting item.

The gaming machine 10 can determine the accepted selection operation by detecting the pressing of the push button 291. Further, the gaming machine 10 may determine the accepted selection operation when the transition to the variable display state is triggered.

Further, the gaming machine 10 does not display the setting window in a state where the pressing of the push button 291 is not detected. The state in which the setting window is not displayed (setting guidance unspecified state) corresponds to a state in which the player is not clearly indicated that the setting change operation can be accepted.

If the setting guidance is not specified, the gaming machine 10 accepts a setting change operation by the cursor SW294 for a predetermined setting item (hidden setting item). For example, the hidden setting items include a brightness (brightness) setting and a volume setting. The gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the upper button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the brightness UP operation for the brightness setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the lower button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the luminance DOWN operation for the luminance setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the right button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the volume UP operation for the volume setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the left button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the volume DOWN operation for the volume setting.

Next, the setting changeable state during non-customer waiting will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a setting state transition accompanying a setting change operation in the setting changeable state (waiting for non-customer) of the third embodiment.

The non-customer waiting state is a state in which the customer is not waiting, for example, a variable display state or a big hit state. The gaming machine 10 has a timing at which it is possible to accept a setting change of a predetermined setting item in a non-customer waiting state (for example, a second setting changeable state).

The gaming machine 10 does not accept the setting change due to the detection of pressing the push button 291 while waiting for a non-customer. The gaming machine 10 mainly uses the detection of pressing the push button 291 while waiting for a non-customer to intervene in the gaming production by the player. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 limits the timing at which the push button 291 is enabled during non-customer waiting, and when the push button 291 is detected at the timing at which the push button 291 is enabled, the required effect ( For example, directing display).

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 does not display the setting window by detecting the pressing of the push button 291. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is always in the setting guidance non-explicit state without being in the setting guidance explicit state while waiting for non-customers.

The gaming machine 10 accepts a setting change operation by the cursor SW294 for a predetermined setting item (unspecified setting item). For example, the hidden setting items include brightness setting and volume setting. The gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the upper button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the brightness UP operation for the brightness setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the lower button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the luminance DOWN operation for the luminance setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the right button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the volume UP operation for the volume setting. Further, the gaming machine 10 detects the ON of the left button on the cursor SW294 and accepts the volume DOWN operation for the volume setting.

The gaming machine 10 may limit the timing at which the volume setting and the brightness setting can be accepted according to the gaming state and the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 can disable the volume setting and the brightness setting (including the failure to accept the setting operation) at a predetermined timing such as a fanfare, a big hit hit notification, or a predetermined period from the symbol stop.

Next, the setting change screen while waiting for customers will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. FIG. 137 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the setting change screen in the setting changeable state (waiting for customers) of the third embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the setting change screen in the setting changeable state (waiting for customers) of the third embodiment.

The screen 820 shown in FIG. 137 (1) is one of the display screens of the display device 41 while waiting for customers. The screen 820 displays a required customer waiting screen 821.
The screen 822 shown in FIG. 137 (2) is one of the display screens of the display device 41 while waiting for customers, and is a display screen in the setting guidance explicit state. The screen 822 displays the setting window 823 by detecting the pressing of the push button 291. The screen 822 superimposes the setting window 823 on the required customer waiting screen 821. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the current gaming state by making a part of the customer waiting screen 821 face behind the setting window 823.

The setting window 823 includes an operation guidance display 824 and a setting item display 825. The operation guidance display 824 is a display for guiding the setting operation to the player. The operation guidance display 824 guides the selection operation by the cursor SW294 and the determination operation by the push button 291. The setting item display 825 guides that there are "QR code (registered trademark) display", "mode selection", "game explanation", and "return" as selection items. Among the selection items, "mode selection" corresponds to the setting item.

The screen 826 shown in FIG. 138 (1) is one of the display screens of the display device 41 while waiting for customers, and is a display screen during the volume setting operation in the setting guidance unspecified state. The screen 826 is a screen displayed by ON detection of the left button 2943 or ON detection of the right button 2944 of the cursor SW294 while waiting for a customer. The screen 826 includes a required customer waiting screen 821, a volume operation guidance display 827, and a volume setting guidance display 828, 829.

The volume operation guidance display 827 guides the volume setting operation by the cursor SW294. In the volume operation guidance display 827, the display mode of the up button and the down button and the display mode of the left button and the right button (for example, color and brightness) are different, so that the left button 2943 and the right button 2944 on the cursor SW294 operate the volume. I will show you that it is a button.

The volume setting guidance display 828 indicates that the set volume is level 4 by displaying eight bar displays (for example, color and brightness). Further, the volume setting guidance display 829 guides that the set volume is level 4 by the numerical value in the speaker-shaped icon.

The volume operation guidance display 827 and the volume setting guidance displays 828 and 829 are arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal row) in the same manner as the arrangement of the left button and the right button. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can directly make the player feel the volume setting operation.

Further, the volume operation guidance display 827 and the volume setting guidance displays 828 and 829 are displayed on the peripheral edge of the screen 826 along the lateral side of the screen 826. As a result, the gaming machine 10 suppresses that the volume operation guidance display 827 and the volume setting guidance displays 828 and 829 impair the visibility of the customer waiting screen 821.

The screen 830 shown in FIG. 138 (2) is one of the display screens of the display device 41 while waiting for customers, and is a display screen during the luminance setting operation in the setting guidance unspecified state. The screen 830 is a screen displayed by the ON detection of the upper button 2941 or the ON detection of the lower button 2942 of the cursor SW294 while waiting for a customer. The screen 830 includes a required customer waiting screen 821, a brightness operation guidance display 831 and a brightness setting guidance display 823,833.

The brightness operation guidance display 831 guides the brightness setting operation by the cursor SW294. In the brightness operation guidance display 831, the display mode of the upper button and the lower button and the display mode of the left button and the right button (for example, color and brightness) are different, so that the upper button 2941 and the lower button 2942 on the cursor SW294 perform the brightness operation. I will show you that it is a button.

The brightness setting guide display 832 indicates that the set brightness is level 4 by displaying eight bar displays (for example, color and brightness). Further, the brightness setting guide display 833 guides that the set brightness is level 4 by the numerical value in the lamp-shaped icon.

The brightness operation guide display 831 and the brightness setting guide display 832, 833 are arranged in the vertical direction (vertical one row) in the same manner as the arrangement of the upper button and the lower button. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can directly make the player feel the brightness setting operation.

Further, the luminance operation guide display 831 and the luminance setting guide display 832, 833 are displayed on the peripheral edge of the screen 830 along the vertical side of the screen 830. As a result, the gaming machine 10 suppresses that the brightness operation guidance display 831 and the brightness setting guidance display 823,833 impair the visibility of the customer waiting screen 821.

Next, the setting change screen during non-customer waiting will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change screen in the setting changeable state (waiting for non-customer) of the third embodiment.

The screen 834 shown in FIG. 139 (1) is one of the display screens of the display device 41 while waiting for non-customers, and is a display screen during the volume setting operation in the setting guidance unspecified state. The screen 834 is a screen displayed by the ON detection of the left button 2943 or the ON detection of the right button 2944 of the cursor SW294 while waiting for a non-customer. The screen 834 includes a required non-customer waiting screen 835, a volume operation guidance display 827, and a volume setting guidance display 828, 829.

The volume operation guidance display 827 and the volume setting guidance displays 828 and 829 are arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal row) in the same manner as the arrangement of the left button and the right button. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can directly make the player feel the volume setting operation.

Further, the volume operation guidance display 827 and the volume setting guidance displays 828 and 829 are displayed on the peripheral edge of the screen 834 along the lateral side of the screen 834. As a result, the gaming machine 10 suppresses that the volume operation guidance display 827 and the volume setting guidance displays 828 and 829 impair the visibility of the non-customer waiting screen 835.

The screen 836 shown in FIG. 139 (2) is one of the display screens of the display device 41 while waiting for non-customers, and is a display screen during the luminance setting operation in the setting guidance unspecified state. The screen 836 is a screen displayed by the ON detection of the upper button 2941 or the ON detection of the lower button 2942 of the cursor SW294 while waiting for a non-customer. The screen 836 includes a required non-customer waiting screen 835, a brightness operation guidance display 831 and a brightness setting guidance display 823,833.

The brightness operation guide display 831 and the brightness setting guide display 832, 833 are arranged in the vertical direction (vertical one row) in the same manner as the arrangement of the upper button and the lower button. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can directly make the player feel the brightness setting operation.

Further, the luminance operation guide display 831 and the luminance setting guide display 832, 833 are displayed on the peripheral edge of the screen 836 along the vertical side of the screen 836. As a result, the gaming machine 10 suppresses that the brightness operation guide display 831 and the brightness setting guide display 832, 833 impair the visibility of the non-customer waiting screen 835.

Next, the volume setting and the brightness setting for each error type will be described with reference to FIG. 140. The volume setting is the volume setting of the volume output from the speakers 19a and 19b in the error notification. The brightness setting is the magnitude setting of the brightness of the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30 in the error notification. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a list of volume setting and brightness setting for each error type of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 prepares various errors. The gaming machine 10 classifies errors by type and sets priorities. The gaming machine 10 notifies an error having a high priority over an error having a low priority. Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the volume and the brightness for each error.

There are two types of errors related to "power on": "RAM initialization" and "power failure recovery". "RAM initialization" is the error with the highest priority, and is notified in preference to other errors. On the other hand, "power failure recovery" is an error having the lowest priority, and is subordinated to other errors to be notified.

The error related to the type "illegal" is an error notified when an event that hinders fair game is detected, and in descending order of priority, "large winning opening fraudulent winning error", "Public radio fraudulent winning error", " There are "magnetic error", "panel radio wave error", "frame radio wave error", and "strong error reservation".

The error related to the type "door opening" is an error having the next highest priority after the type "illegal", and includes "front frame opening error" and "game frame opening error". The "front frame opening error" is an error that is output by detecting the opening of the glass frame 15, and the "game frame opening error" is an error that is output by detecting the opening of the front frame 12. Since there is no difference in the notification contents between the sound output and the lamp / LED output, the "front frame opening error" and the "game frame opening error" are set to the same priority.

The error related to the type "mechanism" is an error having the next highest priority after the type "door opening", and there are "starting port error", "switch error error", and "weak error reservation" in descending order of priority.

The error related to the type "payout" is an error having the next highest priority after the type "mechanism", and there are "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "payout abnormality error" in descending order of priority.

In the "RAM initialization" of the priority order "1", the volume setting and the brightness setting are set to the hall setting (setting by the operation of the game hall staff), and the user setting (setting by the operation of the player) is not possible.

For errors from priority "2" to priority "8", the volume setting is fixed to the maximum volume and the brightness setting is fixed to the maximum brightness. As a result, the gaming machine 10 reliably notifies the game hall staff of serious errors that may interfere with fair gaming.

Note that the "front frame opening error" and "game frame opening error" of priority "8" are those in which the volume setting is not fixed to the maximum volume in consideration of workability such as inspection at a game store. Alternatively, the brightness setting may not be fixed to the maximum brightness. For example, for "front frame opening error" and "game frame opening error", the volume setting and the brightness setting are set to hall settings (settings operated by the game hall staff), and user settings (settings operated by the player) are not possible. be able to. Further, in the "front frame opening error" and the "game frame opening error", the volume setting is fixed to the maximum volume and the brightness setting is fixed to the maximum brightness in one gaming state (for example, during a game), and the other gaming states (for example, during the game). For example, while waiting for a customer), the volume setting and the brightness setting can be set according to the hall settings, respectively.

For the error from the priority "9" to the priority "11" and the error of the priority "14", the volume setting is linked to the user setting and the brightness setting is fixed to the maximum brightness. As a result, since the gaming machine 10 is an error that cannot necessarily be said to be a serious error that may hinder fair gaming, the psychological burden on the user is reduced by the notification in a manner differentiated from the fraudulent notification. While notifying the staff of the amusement park.

For errors from priority "9" to priority "11" and errors of priority "14", the volume setting and brightness setting are linked to the user setting, or the volume setting is fixed to the maximum volume and the brightness setting is set. It may be linked to the user setting, or the volume setting may be fixed to the maximum volume and the brightness setting may be fixed to the maximum brightness. The gaming machine 10 may be capable of changing such a combination of volume setting and brightness setting according to the gaming state.

The error of the priority order "12" is excluded from the notification by the sound output, and the brightness setting is fixed to the maximum brightness. As a result, since the gaming machine 10 is an error that cannot necessarily be said to be a serious error that may hinder fair gaming, the psychological burden on the user is reduced by the notification in a manner differentiated from the fraudulent notification. While notifying the staff of the amusement park. Further, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the content of notification to the user (not subject to notification by sound output) because it cannot be said that an abnormal event immediately brings a disadvantage to the user.

The error of priority "12" may be linked to the luminance setting or the hall setting. The gaming machine 10 may make such a brightness setting changeable according to the gaming state.

The error of the priority order "13" is linked to the user setting in the volume setting, and is excluded from the notification by the lamp or LED output. As a result, the gaming machine 10 reduces the psychological burden on the user by performing notification in a manner differentiated from fraudulent notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 limits the player who cancels the abnormal event to the notification target, and excludes the game hall staff from the notification target.

The error of priority "13" may be one in which the volume setting is fixed to the maximum volume or is linked to the hall setting. The gaming machine 10 may make such a volume setting changeable according to the gaming state.

The strong error reservation and the weak error reservation are reservation errors for future error type expansion. The gaming machine 10 secures the expandability of future errors by reserving errors having different intensities in advance.

Next, the notification sound for each error will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing whether or not the notification sound for each error of the third embodiment can be duplicated with the game sound, and an example of a list of notification contents.

The error from the priority order "1" to the priority order "7" includes an alarm sound (for example, beevo, beevo, etc.) and a message as notification contents. However, for strong error reservation, there is no message setting because the error content is undefined. The errors from the priority order "1" to the priority order "7" cannot be duplicated with the game sound during the error notification. That is, the gaming machine 10 does not output game sounds (sound effects for game production, BGM, character voice, etc.) during error notification from priority "1" to priority "7", and only error notification sounds. Is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the warning effect for the error by giving priority to the progress of the game and giving the error notification.
The error of priority "8" includes a caution sound (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.) and a message as notification contents. The error of priority "8" cannot be duplicated with the game sound during error notification. That is, the gaming machine 10 does not output the gaming sound during the error notification of the priority "8", but outputs only the error notification sound.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of calling attention to the error by giving priority to the progress of the game to notify the error.
The error from the priority order "9" to the priority order "11" includes a caution sound and a message as notification contents. However, for weak error reservation, there is no message setting because the error content is undefined. The errors from the priority order "9" to the priority order "11" can be duplicated with the game sound during the error notification. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs the gaming sound and the error notification sound in parallel during the error notification from the priority order "9" to the priority order "11".

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs error notification in parallel with the progress of the game, thereby suppressing an unexpected disadvantage to the player due to the error notification while maintaining the effect of calling attention to the error.

The errors of priority "12" and priority "15" are not subject to notification by sound output.
The error of priority "13" includes a message and silence for a predetermined period as notification contents. The error of the priority order "13" can be duplicated with the game sound during the error notification. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs the gaming sound and the error notification sound in parallel during the error notification of the priority "13".

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs error notification in parallel with the progress of the game, thereby suppressing an unexpected disadvantage to the player due to the error notification while maintaining the effect of calling attention to the error.

The error of priority "14" includes a message as the notification content. The error of the priority order "14" can be duplicated with the game sound during the error notification. That is, the gaming machine 10 outputs the gaming sound and the error notification sound in parallel during the error notification of the priority "14".

The gaming machine 10 may include a "shoot ball out error" having a priority of "12" and a "power failure recovery" having a priority of "15" as targets for notification by sound output. For example, the gaming machine 10 may include a message, a caution sound, or both in the notification contents of the “shoot ball out error” and the “power failure recovery”, and may overlap with the game sound during the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a message, an alarm sound, or both in the notification contents of the "shoot ball out error" and the "power failure recovery", and may not overlap with the game sound during the error notification.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs error notification in parallel with the progress of the game, thereby suppressing an unexpected disadvantage to the player due to the error notification while maintaining the effect of calling attention to the error.

Next, the notification display for each error will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a list of notification display contents for each error of the third embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 displays an error notification by the frame decoration lamp (frame decoration device 18), the board decoration lamp (board decoration device 46), and the display device (display device 41). The frame decoration lamp and the board decoration lamp are not limited to the lamp, the LED, and the like as long as the error can be notified depending on the light emitting mode.

The error of priority "1" distinguishes the display mode of the frame decoration lamp and the display mode of the board decoration lamp from other decoration patterns as initialization patterns. Further, an error having a priority of "1" is initially displayed on the display device to distinguish it from other displays. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can clearly distinguish the error of the priority "1" from the others.

The error from the priority "2" to the priority "11" and the error of the priority "14" use the display mode of the frame decoration lamp as a warning pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 blinks an all-red lamp (excluding the push button LED 292) for 500 ms as a warning pattern. For errors from priority "2" to priority "7" (errors of type "illegal"), the board decoration lamp is turned off. The gaming machine 10 may hide the fact that an error is occurring and retain the display content before the error occurs, or display on the display device that an error is occurring, including the error type and the error name. You may.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 makes it difficult to continue the game by displaying a predetermined display content on the display device at least until the error of the type "illegal" is cleared with respect to the error of the type "illegal". You may do it. For example, the gaming machine 10 has priority over a layer that displays all or part of the display contents related to the progress of the game (large symbol group, small symbol group, auxiliary symbol group, hold number display, hold display, hold digestion display, etc.). By stacking layers for notifying errors, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the display contents related to the progress of the game. The gaming machine 10 can display a message or an image such as "Please call a staff member" on the layer that notifies the error.

For the error of priority "12", the display mode of the frame decoration lamp is set as a warning pattern, the display mode of the board decoration lamp is set as a normal pattern, and an error replenishment message (for example, "Call a replenishment error staff") is displayed on the display device. indicate. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the occurrence of an abnormality while continuing the game.

For the error of priority "13", the display mode of the frame decoration lamp and the display mode of the board decoration lamp are set as normal patterns, and a ball removal instruction message (for example, "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") is sent to the display device. indicate. The gaming machine 10 may display not only characters but also pictograms and moving images as a ball removal instruction message on the display device to guide the player how to remove the ball from the lower plate. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can request the player to take measures to resolve the error while continuing the game without notifying the surroundings of the occurrence of an abnormality.

The error of priority "15" distinguishes the display mode of the frame decoration lamp and the display mode of the board decoration lamp from other decoration patterns as initialization patterns. In addition, the error of priority "15" displays a power failure recovery message (for example, "Please restart the game") on the display device. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can clearly distinguish the error of the priority "15" from the others, and prompt the player to restart the game.

Next, the error volume determination process for determining the volume of the notification sound for each error will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the error volume determination process of the third embodiment.

The error volume determination process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 during the error occurrence in the sound control process of step D27 of the main process (see FIG. 102).

[Step D161] The control unit acquires the error type and priority of the error being generated.
[Step D162] The control unit determines whether or not the error being generated is a strong error based on the priority. When a plurality of errors occur at the same time, the control unit sets the error having the highest priority as the determination target. Further, the strong error referred to here means an error from the priority "2" to the priority "8". The control unit proceeds to step D163 when the error being generated is a strong error, and proceeds to step D164 when the error being generated is not a strong error.

[Step D163] The control unit sets the volume of the notification sound related to the error to the maximum. Further, the control unit sets the volume of the effect sound related to the game to "0 (silence)" to eliminate the overlap between the notification sound related to the error and the effect sound related to the game.

[Step D164] The control unit determines whether or not the error being generated is a power-on error based on the error type. The power-on error here refers to RAM initialization and power failure recovery. The control unit proceeds to step D165 when the error being generated is a power-on error, and proceeds to step D166 when the error being generated is not a power-on error.

[Step D165] The control unit sets the volume of the notification sound related to the error to the hall set volume, and ends the error volume determination process.
[Step D166] The control unit sets the volume of the notification sound related to the error to the user-set volume, and ends the error volume determination process.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify the error being generated at a volume according to the error type and the priority order.
Next, the error volume and the game volume change timing when a strong error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of changing the error volume and the game volume when a strong error occurs in the third embodiment.

It is assumed that the gaming machine 10 has generated a board radio wave error, which is one of the strong errors, from the timing t11 to the timing t15. At this time, the gaming machine 10 disables the game progress from the timing t11 to the timing t15. The gaming machine 10 repeatedly outputs a warning sound consisting of a warning sound of the period TL01 and a message of the period TL02 while a strong error occurs. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs "Bee Vow" as a warning sound for a board radio wave error, and outputs "Radio wave error" as a message for a board radio wave error. The gaming machine 10 fixes the error volume to the maximum volume (MAX). Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the gaming volume before and after the error occurs as the volume set by the user, and changes the volume to silence, which is the lowest volume (MIN) only during the occurrence of a strong error. Even if the gaming machine 10 sets the output level to "0" instead of changing the gaming volume before and after the error occurs to silence, or excludes the sound output channel of the gaming volume from the target of sound output. Good.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the warning effect for the error by giving priority to the progress of the game and giving the error notification.
Next, the timing of changing the error volume and the game volume when a weak error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of changing the error volume and the game volume when a weak error occurs in the third embodiment.

It is assumed that the gaming machine 10 has generated a payout abnormality error, which is one of the weak errors, from the timing t21 to the timing t23. At this time, the gaming machine 10 allows the gaming progress from the timing t21 to the timing t23 regardless of the occurrence of a weak error. The gaming machine 10 repeatedly outputs a notification sound composed of a message of the period TL03 while a weak error occurs. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs "payout error" as a payout error error message. The gaming machine 10 sets the error volume and the gaming volume as user-set volumes (set values).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs error notification in parallel with the progress of the game, thereby suppressing an unexpected disadvantage to the player due to the error notification while maintaining the effect of calling attention to the error.

Next, a comparison between the notification cycle for strong errors, the notification cycle for weak errors, and the notification cycle for lamp output will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the notification cycle of the strong error and the weak error of the third embodiment and the notification cycle of the lamp output.

The large winning opening illegal winning error, which is one of the strong errors, outputs a warning sound only for the period TL01 from the timing t31 to the timing t33, and then outputs a message only for the period TL02 from the timing t33 to the timing t34. On the other hand, the payout abnormality error, which is one of the weak errors, outputs a message only for the period TL03 from the timing t31 to the timing t34.

In the message output during the period TL03, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the sound output of the message of the payout abnormality error, which is a weak error, in order to give priority to the warning sound of the strong error and the sound output of the message. For example, the gaming machine 10 pays out a weak error by changing the preset suppression volume, the minimum volume, or the output level to "0" during the output of a strong error warning sound or message sound. It is possible to suppress the sound output of an abnormal error message. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to hear the message of the payout abnormality error, which is a weak error, while the warning sound of the strong error or the sound of the message is being output. When two or more errors are duplicated, such a game machine 10 can emphasize an error (for example, a strong error, a higher priority error, etc.) that the player or a staff member wants to be more alerted to. it can.

The frame decoration lamp, which is one of the lamp outputs, has a common display mode for the large winning opening illegal winning error and the payout abnormality error. The frame decoration lamp repeatedly emits a warning pattern of the period TL04 to warn the surrounding environment including the player. For example, the warning pattern is 500 ms on and 500 ms off for all red lamps. The board decoration lamps will be turned off to alert the players.

The gaming machine 10 synchronizes the sound output cycle (TL01 + TL02) of the large winning opening illegal winning error, the sound output cycle (TL03) of the payout abnormality error, and the light emitting cycle (TL04) of the frame decoration lamp. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can synchronize the sound output and the lamp output to enhance the abnormality notification effect.

The gaming machine 10 may display a message corresponding to each error at the same time on the display device while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. The gaming machine 10 may be displayed on a display mode display device such that an error having a high priority has a greater alert effect than an error having a low priority so that the high and low priorities can be easily grasped. Good. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays a high-priority error larger than a low-priority error, displays it brightly, displays it in a conspicuous color, raises the display position, or displays it on top of it. Can be done.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may display two or more errors on the display device in a display mode irrelevant to the priority order. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may display two or more errors on the display device in a display mode according to the error occurrence order or other order. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can entrust the grasping of the high and low priorities to another notification means (for example, sound output or the like).

Further, the gaming machine 10 may have different emission colors while synchronizing the light emission cycles of the frame decoration lamps with the two or more errors while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. For example, in the game machine 10, all the red lamps were turned on for 500 ms and turned off for 500 ms while only one error occurred, but the lamps were turned on in two or more colors while two or more errors occurred. It may be lit repeatedly, and the red lamp and the blue lamp are alternately lit every 500 ms while the two errors are occurring, or the red lamp, the blue lamp and the yellow lamp are lit while the three errors are occurring. And may be repeatedly lit every 500 ms. The gaming machine 10 may or may not be provided with an extinguishing period each time the color is changed and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 may fix the lighting period of the frame decoration lamp regardless of the number of errors (for example, 500 ms), or may change it according to the number of errors. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the lighting period of the frame decoration lamp can be set to 400 ms while two errors occur, and the lighting period of the frame decoration lamp can be set to 300 ms while three errors occur. ..

Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a mixed color of the colors corresponding to each error while two or more errors occur at the same time. For example, when the gaming machine 10 associates a strong error with a red emission and a weak error with a yellow emission, the gaming machine 10 can emit orange light by simultaneously generating a strong error and a weak error.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a specific color while two or more errors occur at the same time. For example, when the gaming machine 10 associates a strong error with a red emission and a weak error with a yellow emission, the gaming machine 10 can emit white light by simultaneously generating a strong error and a weak error.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
The first modification of the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the sound output cycles of different errors are synchronized by setting the silent portion.

First, a comparison between the notification cycle of a strong error, the notification cycle of a weak error, and the notification cycle of the lamp output will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a notification cycle of a strong error, a notification cycle of a weak error, and a notification cycle of a lamp output according to the first modification of the third embodiment.

One of the strong errors, the large winning opening illegal winning error, outputs a warning sound only for the period TL01 from the timing t41 to the timing t44, then outputs a message for the period TL02 from the timing t44 to the timing t45, and then outputs a message. Silence is output (silenced) only for the period TL05 from the timing t45 to the timing t46.

On the other hand, the payout abnormality error, which is one of the weak errors, outputs a message only for the period TL03 from the timing t41 to the timing t43, and then outputs silence for the period TL06 from the timing t43 to the timing t46.

In the message output during the period TL03, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the sound output of the message of the payout abnormality error, which is a weak error, in order to give priority to the warning sound of the strong error and the sound output of the message. For example, the gaming machine 10 pays out a weak error by changing the preset suppression volume, the minimum volume, or the output level to "0" during the output of a strong error warning sound or message sound. It is possible to suppress the sound output of an abnormal error message. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to hear the message of the payout abnormality error, which is a weak error, while the warning sound of the strong error or the sound of the message is being output. When two or more errors are duplicated, such a game machine 10 can emphasize an error (for example, a strong error, a higher priority error, etc.) that the player or a staff member wants to be more alerted to. it can.

The frame decoration lamp, which is one of the lamp outputs, has a common display mode for the large winning opening illegal winning error and the payout abnormality error. The frame decoration lamp repeatedly emits a warning pattern of the period TL04 to warn the surrounding environment including the player. The board decoration lamps will be turned off to alert the players.

The gaming machine 10 synchronizes the sound output cycle (TL01 + TL02 + TL05) of the large winning opening illegal winning error, the sound output cycle (TL03 + TL06) of the payout abnormality error, and the light emitting cycle (TL04) of the frame decoration lamp. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can synchronize the sound output and the lamp output to enhance the abnormality notification effect. In the gaming machine 10, the silence period set for the strong error is shorter than the silence period set for the weak error so as not to impair the notification effect of the strong error.

The gaming machine 10 may display a message corresponding to each error at the same time on the display device while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. The gaming machine 10 may be displayed on a display mode display device such that an error having a high priority has a greater alert effect than an error having a low priority so that the high and low priorities can be easily grasped. Good.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may display two or more errors on the display device in a display mode irrelevant to the priority order. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may display two or more errors on the display device in a display mode according to the error occurrence order or other order. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can entrust the grasping of the high and low priorities to another notification means (for example, sound output or the like).

Further, the gaming machine 10 may have different emission colors while synchronizing the light emission cycles of the frame decoration lamps with the two or more errors while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. The gaming machine 10 may or may not be provided with an extinguishing period each time the color is changed and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 may fix the lighting period of the frame decoration lamp regardless of the number of errors (for example, 500 ms), or may change it according to the number of errors.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a mixed color of the colors corresponding to each error while two or more errors occur at the same time. Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a specific color while two or more errors occur at the same time.

Next, a comparison between the notification cycle of two different strong errors and the notification cycle of the lamp output will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing two strong error notification cycles and a lamp output notification cycle of the first modification of the third embodiment.

One of the two different strong errors, the large winning opening illegal winning error, outputs a warning sound for the period TL01 from timing t51 to timing t53, and then outputs a message for the period TL02 from timing t53 to timing t55. It outputs, and then outputs (silences) silence for the period TL05 from timing t55 to timing t56.

On the other hand, the Fuden fraudulent winning error, which is the other of the two different strong errors, outputs a warning sound only for the period TL01 from the timing t51 to the timing t53, and then only for the period TL07 from the timing t53 to the timing t54. A message is output, and then silence is output for the period TL08 from timing t54 to timing t56.

In the game machine 10, during the period TL07, the message output of the large winning opening illegal winning error and the message output of the Fuden illegal winning error overlap. In the period TL07, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the sound output of the message of the payout abnormality error, which is a weak error, in order to give priority to the sound output of the warning sound of the strong error and the message. For example, the gaming machine 10 pays out a weak error by changing the preset suppression volume, the minimum volume, or the output level to "0" during the output of a strong error warning sound or message sound. It is possible to suppress the sound output of an abnormal error message. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to hear the message of the payout abnormality error, which is a weak error, while the warning sound of the strong error or the sound of the message is being output. When two or more errors are duplicated, such a game machine 10 can emphasize an error (for example, a strong error, a higher priority error, etc.) that the player or a staff member wants to be more alerted to. it can.

The frame decoration lamp, which is one of the lamp outputs, has a common display mode for the large winning opening illegal winning error and the general electric winning illegal winning error. The frame decoration lamp repeatedly emits a warning pattern of the period TL04 to warn the surrounding environment including the player. The board decoration lamps will be turned off to alert the players.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may have different emission colors while synchronizing the light emission cycles of the frame decoration lamps with the two or more errors while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. The gaming machine 10 may or may not be provided with an extinguishing period each time the color is changed and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 may fix the lighting period of the frame decoration lamp regardless of the number of errors (for example, 500 ms), or may change it according to the number of errors.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a mixed color of the colors corresponding to each error while two or more errors occur at the same time. Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a specific color while two or more errors occur at the same time.

The gaming machine 10 synchronizes the sound output cycle (TL01 + TL02 + TL05) of the large winning opening illegal winning error, the sound output cycle (TL01 + TL07 + TL08) of the general electric winning illegal winning error, and the light emitting cycle (TL04) of the frame decoration lamp. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can synchronize the sound output and the lamp output to enhance the abnormality notification effect. In the gaming machine 10, the silence period set for the high priority error is shorter than the silence period set for the low priority error so as not to impair the notification effect of the high priority error.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 provides a silence period between the messages to be repeatedly output, so that even if the warning sound and the message length related to the error notification sound are freely set, the entire length is adjusted according to the silence period. it can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the message easier for the player to hear, and can enhance the listening effect of the message in comparison with the silent period. Further, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the output of the message from beginning to end by providing a silent period, which facilitates the confirmation of the gaming sound by the player.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
The second modification of the third embodiment is different from the first modification of the third embodiment in that the magnitude of the silence period is fixed.

Next, a comparison between the notification cycle of two different strong errors and the notification cycle of the lamp output will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing two strong error notification cycles and a lamp output notification cycle of the second modification of the third embodiment.

The large winning opening illegal winning error, which is one of two different strong errors, outputs a warning sound only for the period TL01 from the timing t61 to the timing t63, and then outputs a message only for the period TL02 from the timing t63 to the timing t65. It outputs, and then outputs (silences) silence for the period TL05 from timing t65 to timing t67.

On the other hand, the Fuden illegal winning error, which is the other of the two different strong errors, outputs a warning sound only for the period TL01 from the timing t61 to the timing t63, and then only for the period TL07 from the timing t63 to the timing t64. A message is output, and then silence is output for the period TL05 from timing t64 to timing t66.

In the message output during the period TL07, the gaming machine 10 is a strong error with a low priority in order to give priority to the warning sound of the large winning opening illegal winning error and the sound output of the message, which is a strong error with a high priority. Suppress the sound output of the Fuden illegal winning error message. For example, the gaming machine 10 is usually used by changing the preset suppression volume, the minimum volume, or the output level to "0" during the sound output of the warning sound or the message sound of the large winning opening illegal winning error. It is possible to suppress the sound output of the message of the electric fraudulent winning error. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to hear the message of the error having a low priority while the warning sound of the error having a high priority or the sound of the message is being output. When two or more errors are duplicated, such a game machine 10 can emphasize an error (for example, a strong error, a higher priority error, etc.) that the player or a staff member wants to be more alerted to. it can.

The gaming machine 10 may display a message corresponding to each error at the same time on the display device while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. The gaming machine 10 may be displayed on a display mode display device such that an error having a high priority has a greater alert effect than an error having a low priority so that the high and low priorities can be easily grasped. Good.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may display two or more errors on the display device in a display mode irrelevant to the priority order. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may display two or more errors on the display device in a display mode according to the error occurrence order or other order. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can entrust the grasping of the high and low priorities to another notification means (for example, sound output or the like).

The frame decoration lamp, which is one of the lamp outputs, has a common display mode for the large winning opening illegal winning error and the general electric winning illegal winning error. The frame decoration lamp repeatedly emits a warning pattern of the period TL04 to warn the surrounding environment including the player. The board decoration lamps will be turned off to alert the players.

The gaming machine 10 may have different emission colors while synchronizing the light emission cycles of the frame decoration lamps with the two or more errors while two or more errors are occurring at the same time. Further, the gaming machine 10 may or may not be provided with an extinguishing period each time the color is changed and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, the gaming machine 10 may fix the lighting period of the frame decoration lamp regardless of the number of errors (for example, 500 ms), or may change it according to the number of errors.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a mixed color of the colors corresponding to each error while two or more errors occur at the same time. Further, the gaming machine 10 may use the emission color of the frame decoration lamp as a specific color while two or more errors occur at the same time.

The gaming machine 10 synchronizes the sound output cycle (TL01 + TL02 + TL05) of the large winning opening illegal winning error with the light emitting cycle (TL04) of the frame decoration lamp. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, the sound output cycle (TL01 + TL07 + TL05) of the illegal winning error of the general electric machine, the sound output cycle of the illegal winning error of the big winning opening, and the light emitting cycle of the frame decoration lamp are asynchronous.

However, since the gaming machine 10 fixes the length of the silence period for two different strong errors, it facilitates the player's confirmation of the notification sound. Further, since the gaming machine 10 fixes the output period of the warning sound for two different strong errors, the player can easily confirm the notification sound.

The gaming machine 10 repeatedly outputs the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error and the sound output of the general electric winning illegal winning error in the sound output cycle. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a warning sound for the period TL01 from the timing t67 for the large winning opening illegal winning error, and outputs a warning sound for the period TL01 from the timing t66 for the Fuden illegal winning error. The gaming machine 10 may end the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error and the sound output of the general electric winning illegal winning error with the sound output for one cycle. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs silence after timing t67 for a large winning opening illegal winning error, and outputs silence after timing t66 for a general electric winning illegal winning error.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the first to second modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b), output volume setting means (cursor SW294, effect control device 300), light emitting means (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46), and brightness. The setting means (cursor SW294, effect control device 300) and the control means (effect control device 300) are included. The sound output means can output a game sound and an error notification sound. The output volume setting means can set the output volume of the sound output means. The light emitting means can perform a game effect and an error notification depending on the light emitting mode. The brightness setting means can set the brightness of the light emitting means. The control means follows the first error (for example, a weak error such as a payout abnormality error) that outputs sound from the sound output means according to the output volume setting by the output volume setting means, and the output volume setting by the output volume setting means. It is possible to generate a second error (for example, a strong error such as a large winning opening illegal winning error) that outputs sound from the sound output means at a fixed output volume, and the first error and the second error , The error notification is performed by the light emitting means in a predetermined light emitting mode with a fixed brightness regardless of the brightness setting by the brightness setting means.

(2) The first error of (1) includes at least one of an error warning sound (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.), an error message (for example, "starting port error"), and silence for a predetermined period. ..

(3) The silence in (2) is a predetermined fixed period.
(4) The silence in (2) is an indefinite period until the end of a predetermined error.
[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 165. When a low-priority error occurs during notification of a high-priority error, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment notifies the high-priority error in preference to the low-priority error.

First, the difference in the error priority of the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment from that of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a list showing the priority order of the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment.

In the third embodiment (see FIG. 140), the same priority "8" is set for the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the type "door opening", but the game of the fourth embodiment. The machine 10 sets the priority "8a" for the front frame opening error and sets the priority "8b" for the game frame opening error. The priority "8a" is a priority that takes precedence over the priority "8b".

Therefore, the front frame opening error corresponds to an error having a higher priority than the game frame opening error.
Here, the single occurrence of the front frame opening error will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occurs independently.

The effect control device 300 receives a command for notifying the front frame opening error from the game control device 100 at the timing t11, and performs a notification operation by sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 can output sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, the effect control device 300 can output lamps from the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46. Further, the effect control device 300 can output a display from the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t11, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t12 and outputs silence. Therefore, the effect control device 300 continues to output the maximum volume sound for the period TL1 (for example, 15 seconds) from the timing t11 to the timing t12. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the lamp output in the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness after the timing t12 and the display output in which the error name is clearly indicated.

The effect control device 300 receives a command for ending the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t13, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the lamp output. Therefore, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by silent output for the period TL2 from the timing t12 to the timing t13. Such silent output takes precedence over low priority error sound output. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the display output only for the period TL4 from the timing t11 to the timing t13.

The effect control device 300 ends the notification operation by the lamp output at the timing t14 after the period TL5 (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the timing t13. Therefore, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the lamp output for the period TL3 from the timing t11 to the timing t14.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification.
Although the front frame opening error has been described as an example of the door opening error (type "door opening"), the same applies to the game frame opening error, which is another door opening error.

Next, the sound output of the door opening error performed during the period TL1 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the sound output of the door opening error of the fourth embodiment.
The effect control device 300 outputs a notification sound of the total period TL1 including a warning sound of the period TL11 (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.) and a message of the period TL12 (for example, "the door is open") as a door opening error. ..

Although the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error both output the same warning sound and the same message, one or both of the warning sound and the message may be different. For example, the effect control device 300 may set the message of the front frame opening error as "the front frame is open" and the message of the game frame opening error as "the game frame is open".

Next, the overlapping occurrence of the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error will be described. First, a case where a front frame opening error having a high priority occurs and a game frame opening error having a low priority occurs later and the errors overlap will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first). It is a figure which shows (the 1).

The effect control device 300 receives a front frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t21, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t21, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t22 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives the game frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t23, and two errors having different priorities overlap. Since the effect control device 300 has a high priority of the front frame opening error that has occurred earlier, the effect control device 300 again outputs the maximum volume sound for the front frame opening error.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t24 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives a command for ending the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t25, and ends the notification operation by the display output for the front frame opening error. However, since the game frame opening error is occurring, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the display output for the game frame opening error, and also continues the notification operation by the sound output (however, silence) and the display output. ..

The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the game frame opening error notification at the timing t26, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the lamp output.

The effect control device 300 ends the notification operation by the lamp output at the timing t27 after the lapse of the period TL5 from the timing t26.
Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error twice, the period TL1 from the timing t21 to the timing t22 and the period TL1 from the timing t23 to the timing t24, and the timing from the timing t22. Sound is output silently twice, the period TL211 up to t23 and the period TL212 from timing t24 to timing t26. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the lamp output only for the period TL31 from the timing t21 to the timing t27. Further, the effect control device 300 describes the front frame opening error in the period TL411 from the timing t21 to the timing t23, and the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error in the period TL412 from the timing t23 to the timing t25, from the timing t25 to the timing t26. During the period up to TL413, a notification operation is performed by display output for a game frame opening error.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated.

Next, regarding the front frame opening error, a case where the game frame opening error occurs repeatedly during the sound output of the maximum volume will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first). It is a figure which shows (the 2).

The effect control device 300 receives a front frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t31, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t31, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 receives a game frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 during the output of the maximum volume sound at the timing t32, and two errors having different priorities overlap. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by outputting the maximum volume sound again at the timing t32.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t33 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives a command for ending the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t34, and ends the notification operation by the display output for the front frame opening error. However, since the game frame opening error is occurring, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the display output for the game frame opening error, and also continues the notification operation by the sound output (however, silence) and the display output. ..

The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the game frame opening error notification at the timing t35, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the lamp output.

The effect control device 300 ends the notification operation by the lamp output at the timing t36 after the lapse of the period TL5 from the timing t35.
Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error twice, the period TL12 from the timing t31 to the timing t32 and the period TL1 from the timing t32 to the timing t33, and the timing from the timing t33. Sound is output silently only for TL22 during the period up to t35. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the lamp output for the period TL32 from the timing t31 to the timing t36. Further, the effect control device 300 describes the front frame opening error in the period TL421 from the timing t31 to the timing t32, and the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error in the period TL422 from the timing t32 to the timing t34, from the timing t34 to the timing t35. During the period until TL423, a notification operation is performed by display output for a game frame opening error.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated.

Next, a case where the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error occur at the same time will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate.

The effect control device 300 receives the front frame opening error notification command and the game frame opening notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t41, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. .. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume and the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness at the timing t41. Further, the effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error by the display output clearly indicating the error name at the timing t41.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t42 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives a command for ending the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t43, and ends the notification operation by the display output for the front frame opening error. However, since the game frame opening error is occurring, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the display output for the game frame opening error, and also continues the notification operation by the sound output (however, silence) and the display output. ..

The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the game frame opening error notification at the timing t44, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the lamp output.

The effect control device 300 ends the notification operation by the lamp output at the timing t45 after the lapse of the period TL5 from the timing t44.
Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error for the period TL1 from the timing t41 to the timing t42, and outputs the sound silently for the period TL23 from the timing t42 to the timing t44. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the lamp output only for the period TL33 from the timing t41 to the timing t45. Further, the effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error in the period TL431 from the timing t41 to the timing t43, and the game frame opening error in the period TL432 from the timing t43 to the timing t44 by the display output. To do.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated.

Next, regarding the game frame opening error, a case where the front frame opening error occurs duplicately during the sound output of the maximum volume will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is an example of a timing chart showing the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs later). It is a figure which shows the 4).

The effect control device 300 receives a game frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t51, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the game frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t51, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t52 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives the command of the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t53, and two errors having different priorities overlap. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by outputting the maximum volume sound at the timing t53.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t54 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives a command for ending the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t55, and ends the notification operation by the display output for the front frame opening error. However, since the game frame opening error is occurring, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the display output for the game frame opening error, and also continues the notification operation by the sound output (however, silence) and the display output. ..

The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the game frame opening error notification at the timing t56, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the lamp output.

The effect control device 300 ends the notification operation by the lamp output at the timing t57 after the lapse of the period TL5 from the timing t56.
Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the game frame opening error for the period TL1 from the timing t51 to the timing t52, and at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error for the period TL1 from the timing t53 to the timing t54. The sound is output twice, the period TL241 from the timing t52 to the timing t53 and the period TL242 from the timing t54 to the timing t56, and the sound is output silently. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the lamp output only for the period TL34 from the timing t51 to the timing t57. Further, the effect control device 300 describes the game frame opening error in the period TL441 from the timing t51 to the timing t53, and the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error in the period TL442 from the timing t53 to the timing t55, from the timing t55 to the timing t56. During the period up to TL443, a notification operation is performed by display output for a game frame opening error.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated.

When the game machine 10 outputs the message "door is open" together with the sound output of the front frame opening error and the sound output of the game frame opening error, the game machine 10 sounds the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error. It can be made distinguishable from the output. However, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to distinguish the front frame opening error and the gaming frame opening error from the display output.

Next, an error notification process for setting the notification operation by the sound output, the lamp output, and the display output when an error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a flowchart of error notification processing according to the fourth embodiment.

The error notification process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the error command process of step D68 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 104).

[Step D171] The control unit determines whether or not there are two or more overlapping errors. The control unit proceeds to step D172 when there are no duplicate errors, and proceeds to step D175 when there are duplicate errors.

[Step D172] The control unit starts voice notification regarding the error that has occurred. For example, the control unit sets the output of sound data corresponding to the error that occurred in the sound output channel that outputs the error.

[Step D173] The control unit starts lamp notification regarding the error that has occurred. For example, the control unit sets a light emission pattern corresponding to the error that has occurred.
[Step D174] The control unit starts display notification regarding the error that has occurred. For example, the control unit sets the display content corresponding to the error that has occurred. The control unit ends the error notification process after starting the display notification.

[Step D175] When the error that has occurred has a higher priority than the error that is occurring, the control unit starts voice notification regarding the newly generated error. For example, the control unit updates the sound data corresponding to the error being generated with the sound data corresponding to the generated error with respect to the sound output of the sound output channel that outputs the error.

[Step D176] The control unit continues the lamp notification regarding the error that has occurred.
[Step D177] The control unit updates the display notification with respect to the error that has occurred. For example, the control unit adds display contents corresponding to the error that has occurred. The control unit ends the error notification process after updating the display notification.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can start the notification operation by the sound output, the lamp output, and the display output when an error occurs. Further, when the errors are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 can update the notification operation according to the priority of the errors.

The gaming machine 10 sets the start and end of the sound output (excluding the silent output) during the error notification process, but sets only the start and does not set the end of the lamp output and the display output. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated.

Next, an error notification release process for canceling the notification operation by the sound output, the lamp output, and the display output at the end of the error will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the error notification release process of the fourth embodiment.

The error notification release process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the error command process of step D68 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 104).

[Step D181] The control unit cancels the display notification regarding the terminated error. If the errors occur in duplicate, the control unit continues the display notification for the errors that have not ended.

[Step D182] The control unit determines whether or not all the errors (however, limited to the errors to be notified by the lamp) have been completed. The control unit proceeds to step D183 when all the errors have ended, and ends the error notification release process when all the errors have not ended.

[Step D183] Since all the errors have been completed, the control unit reserves the lamp notification release and ends the error notification release process.
As a result, the control unit cancels the lamp notification after the reserved time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Note that the error notification release process does not target the sound output for error notification release because the final stage is set during the error notification process.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the abnormality notification effect to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 has been described by citing a door opening error as an error having a high priority (front frame opening error) and an error having a low priority (game frame opening error), but the present invention is limited to this. It may be an error of another type, or it may be a combination of two or more types of errors.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 shares a message included in the error notification sound between an error having a high priority (front frame opening error) and an error having a low priority (game frame opening error) (“door”). Is open "), but a different message may be included in the error notification sound.

Further, when an error is duplicated, the gaming machine 10 assigns the duplicated error notification sound to a different sound output channel, and controls the sound for each sound output channel (for example, output notification content, output volume, output destination (speaker 19a). , 19b)) may be specified. Further, when the errors are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 may set a priority order for each sound output channel so that the notification effect is different. For example, the gaming machine 10 assigns a high-priority error to the first sound output channel, assigns a low-priority error to the second sound output channel, and secondizes the notification effect of the first sound output channel. It may be made higher than the notification effect by the sound output channel of. More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the volume of the first sound output channel is set to be higher than the volume of the second sound output channel, or the output destination of the first sound output channel is set to the speaker 19a. The output destination of the sound output channel of 2 is the speaker 19b.

The gaming machine 10 may assign an error to the sound output channel by setting a priority in advance, or assign an error to the sound output channel and then assign the priority to the assigned sound output channel. It may be set. For example, when the game machine 10 assigns an error to the sound output channel by setting a priority in advance, the error that occurs earlier is assigned to the first sound output channel, and the error that occurs later is more than the error that occurs earlier. Also assigns an error that occurs later when the priority is low to the second sound output channel. On the other hand, when the error that occurs later has a higher priority than the error that occurred earlier, the gaming machine 10 assigns the error that occurred later to the first sound output channel, and the error that occurred earlier Change the assignment to the second sound output channel. Then, the game machine 10 releases the second sound output channel when the error assigned to the second sound output channel is cleared, and the game machine 10 releases the second sound output channel when the error assigned to the first sound output channel is cleared. The error assignment assigned to the second sound output channel is changed to the first sound output channel, and the second sound output channel is released.

Further, for example, when the gaming machine 10 assigns an error to a sound output channel and then sets a priority for the assigned sound output channel, the priority of the sound output channel to which the error is assigned is being generated at the same time. Set according to the error priority of, and update from time to time.

[Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment]
The first modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that error notification is performed by sound output for an error having a higher priority among the errors remaining when the duplicate error is cleared.

A case where a high-priority front frame opening error occurs, a low-priority game frame opening error occurs later, errors are duplicated, and a high-priority error ends first will be described with reference to FIG. 159. .. FIG. 159 shows the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the first modification of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first). It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart.

The effect control device 300 receives a front frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t61, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t61, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t62 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives the game frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t63, and two errors having different priorities overlap. Since the effect control device 300 has a high priority of the front frame opening error that has occurred earlier, the effect control device 300 again outputs the maximum volume sound for the front frame opening error.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t64 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives a command for ending the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t65, and ends the notification operation by the display output for the front frame opening error. Here, since the game frame opening error is occurring, the effect control device 300 outputs the maximum volume sound for the game frame opening error. When the front frame opening error is cleared, if two or more errors are still duplicated, the effect control device 300 outputs the maximum volume sound for the error having the highest priority among the remaining errors. Further, since the game frame opening error is occurring, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the display output for the game frame opening error, and also continues the notification operation by the display output.

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t66 and outputs silence.
The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the game frame opening error notification at the timing t67, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 continues the notification operation by the lamp output.

The effect control device 300 ends the notification operation by the lamp output at the timing t68 after the lapse of the period TL5 from the timing t67.
Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error twice, the period TL1 from the timing t61 to the timing t62 and the period TL1 from the timing t63 to the timing t64, and the timing from the timing t65. Only the period TL1 up to t66 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the game frame opening error, the period TL251 from timing t62 to timing t63, the period TL252 from timing t64 to timing t65, and the period from timing t66 to timing t67. Sound is output silently three times during the period TL253. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the notification operation by the lamp output for the period TL35 from the timing t61 to the timing t68. Further, the effect control device 300 describes the front frame opening error in the period TL451 from the timing t61 to the timing t63, and the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error in the period TL452 from the timing t63 to the timing t65, from the timing t65 to the timing t67. During the period up to TL453, a notification operation is performed by display output for a game frame opening error.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of notifying an error having a high priority when errors having different priorities are duplicated. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having the higher priority among the remaining errors even after the error having the higher priority ends.

[Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment]
The second modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that a silent period is set within the period TL1.

Next, the sound output of the door opening error performed during the period TL1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the sound output of the door opening error of the second modification of the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 is a total consisting of the silence of the period TL131, the warning sound of the period TL132 (for example, piron, piron, etc.), the message of the period TL133 (for example, "the door is open"), and the silence of the period TL134. The notification sound of the period TL1 is output as a common door opening error for the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error.

In this way, since the effect control device 300 is provided with silence at the beginning of the sound output of the door opening error, two or more errors are duplicated and another notification sound is output later to the notification sound being output first. When this is done (see, for example, FIG. 154), the boundary of the notification sound becomes clear. Further, since the effect control device 300 provides silence at the end of the sound output of the door opening error, the difference in the output period of the warning sound and the message is absorbed in the silent period, and the sound output of the door opening error is performed for a period as a whole. Make it easy to do with TL1.

Although the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error both output the same warning sound and the same message, one or both of the warning sound and the message may be different. For example, the effect control device 300 may set the message of the front frame opening error as "the front frame is open" and the message of the game frame opening error as "the game frame is open". Further, although the effect control device 300 is provided with silence for a predetermined period before the warning sound and after the message, it may be provided in either one, or silence may be provided between the warning sound and the message. It may be.

[Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment]
The third modification of the fourth embodiment is to extend the output period of the notification sound of the error that occurred later when the output of the notification sound of the error that occurred earlier is stopped due to the error that occurred later. It differs from the fourth embodiment.

First, a case where a game frame opening error having a low priority occurs and a front frame opening error having a high priority occurs later and the errors overlap will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 shows the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the third modification of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs later). It is a figure which shows an example of a chart.

The effect control device 300 receives a game frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t71, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the game frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t71, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 receives the command of the front frame opening error notification from the game control device 100 at the timing t72, and two errors having different priorities overlap. Since the effect control device 300 has a high priority of the front frame opening error that occurs later, the effect control device 300 outputs the maximum volume sound for the front frame opening error instead of the sound output of the game frame opening error that occurred earlier. Therefore, the sound output of the game frame opening error ends with the stop period AT remaining in the scheduled sound output period TL1 from the timing t71 to the timing t73.

When the scheduled sound output period TL1 from the timing t72 to the timing t74 expires at the timing t74, the effect control device 300 once finishes the maximum volume sound output and starts the maximum volume sound output in the extended period BT. To do. The extension period BT is a period set corresponding to the suspension period AT. The extension period BT is the same period as the discontinuation period AT, but may be a different period (for example, a shorter period).

The effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output at the timing t75 and outputs silence.
Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound at the maximum volume for the game frame opening error during the period from timing t71 to timing t72 (= TL1-AT), and during the period from timing t72 to timing t75 (= TL1 + BT). Front frame opening error Outputs sound at maximum volume.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, when the errors having different priorities are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having a higher priority that occurs later. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel that the errors are duplicated by extending the error notification period of the error having a high priority that occurs later. Such a gaming machine 10 can further reduce the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification.

Next, a case where a front frame opening error having a high priority occurs and a game frame opening error having a low priority occurs later and the errors overlap will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 shows the timing of the reception command and the notification operation when the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error of the third modification of the fourth embodiment occur in duplicate (the front frame opening error occurs first). It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart.

The effect control device 300 receives a front frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t81, and performs a notification operation using sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the front frame opening error by the sound output of the maximum volume at the timing t81, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name.

The effect control device 300 receives the game frame opening error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t82, and two errors having different priorities overlap. Since the priority of the game frame opening error that occurred later is low, the effect control device 300 restarts the sound output of the front frame opening error that occurred earlier from the beginning. Therefore, the effect control device 300 only outputs the sound of the front frame opening error in the partial notification period BT of the sound output period TL1 scheduled from the timing t81, and outputs the sound of the front frame opening error at the timing t82. To cancel. Then, the effect control device 300 again outputs the sound of the front frame opening error of the sound output period TL1 from the timing t82.

When the scheduled sound output period TL1 expires at the timing t83, the effect control device 300 finishes the maximum volume sound output and outputs silence. The effect control device 300 sets the sound output period TL1 again after providing the predetermined silent period CT until the front frame opening error is released, and outputs the sound of the front frame opening error. May be good. Further, the effect control device 300 sets the sound output period TL1 again after providing the predetermined silence period CT until the front frame opening error is released and the game frame opening error is released, and the game frame is opened. An error sound may be output.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 outputs the first sound at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error during the period BT (= <TL1) from the timing t81 to the timing t82, and the period from the timing t82 to the timing t83 (=). TL1) outputs the second sound at the maximum volume for the front frame opening error.

As a result, the effect control device 300 can output a series of sounds at the maximum volume during the period (= B1 + TL1) from the timing t81 to the timing t83. Therefore, the effect control device 300 extends the sound output period of the front frame opening error when a front frame opening error having a high priority occurs and a game frame opening error having a low priority occurs later and the errors overlap. can do. The effect control device 300 extends the sound output period (pre-extension) by redoing the sound output of the front frame opening error in the middle, but extends the sound output period (post-extension) after the sound output period expires. Alternatively, the middle of the sound output period may be extended (medium extension). For example, the effect control device 300 can extend the middle of the sound output period by inserting a warning sound or the like in the middle of the sound output period.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, when the errors having different priorities are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having a higher priority that has occurred earlier. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel that the errors are duplicated by extending the error notification period of the error having a high priority that has occurred earlier. Such a gaming machine 10 can further reduce the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification.

[Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment shares a message included in the error notification sound between the front frame opening error (error having a high priority) and the game frame opening error (error having a low priority) (“the door opens). However, the gaming machines 10 of the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment are different in that different messages are included in the error notification sound.

Next, the sound output of the door opening error performed during the period TL1 will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the sound output of the door opening error of the modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment.

First, the door is opened to absorb the difference in the output period of the message caused by making the message non-common between the front frame opening error (error with high priority) and the game frame opening error (error with low priority) in a silent period. The error is shown in FIG. 163 (1).

The effect control device 300 is a notification sound of the total period TL1 including a warning sound of the period TL141 (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.), a message of the period TL142 (for example, "the glass door is open"), and silence of the period TL143. Is output as a front frame opening error.

The effect control device 300 is a notification sound of the total period TL1 including a warning sound of the period TL141 (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.), a message of the period TL144 (for example, "the game frame is open"), and silence of the period TL145. Is output as a game frame opening error.

Since the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error output different messages, the message output period may be different. Such a difference in the message output period is absorbed (adjusted) by the silence period provided at the end of the sound output, and the sound output of the door opening error is performed in the period TL1 as a whole.

Next, a door that does not absorb the difference in the output period of the message caused by making a non-common message between the front frame opening error (error with high priority) and the game frame opening error (error with low priority) in a silent period. The release error is shown in FIG. 163 (2).

The effect control device 300 is a notification sound of the total period TL1 including a warning sound of the period TL151 (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.), a message of the period TL152 (for example, "the glass door is open"), and silence of the period TL153. Is output as a front frame opening error.

The effect control device 300 has a total period (TL1-TL156) including a warning sound of the period TL151 (for example, pyrone, pyrone, etc.), a message of the period TL154 (for example, "the game frame is open"), and silence of the period TL155. ) Is output as a game frame opening error.

Since the front frame opening error and the game frame opening error output different messages, the message output period may be different. As a result, the gaming machine 10 may have a different sound output period depending on the type of error, but the silent period is fixed regardless of the type of error. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform error notification that is easy for the player to hear. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a silence period after the message period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be before the warning period or between the warning period and the message period.

In addition, in order to give priority to the warning sound of the front frame opening error and the sound output of the message having a high priority, the gaming machine 10 may suppress the sound output of the message of the game frame opening error having a low priority. .. For example, the gaming machine 10 opens the gaming frame by changing the preset suppression volume, the minimum volume, or the output level to "0" during the sound output of the warning sound or the message of the front frame opening error. It is possible to suppress the sound output of error warning sounds and messages. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to hear the message of the error having a low priority while the warning sound of the error having a high priority or the sound of the message is being output.

Further, the gaming machine 10 gives priority to the warning sound of the front frame opening error and the sound output of the message having a higher priority than the sound output of the message of the game frame opening error having a lower priority. The warning sound of the release error and the sound output of the message may be emphasized. For example, during the sound output of the front frame opening error warning sound or message, the gaming machine 10 changes the maximum volume or increases the number of speakers that output sound, so that the front frame opening error warning sound or message is output. The sound output can be emphasized. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player listen to the high-priority error message well while outputting the high-priority error warning sound and the message sound.

When two or more errors are duplicated, such a game machine 10 can emphasize an error (for example, a strong error, a higher priority error, etc.) that the player or a staff member wants to be more alerted to. it can.

[Modification 5 of the fourth embodiment]
The fifth modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that the valid / invalid switching timing of the volume adjustment set by the user is changed when the output period of the error notification sound is extended. ..

When the output period of the error notification sound is extended, the change of the enable / disable switching timing of the volume adjustment set by the user will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 shows a timing showing a reception command, a notification operation, and a timing for switching between valid / invalid volume adjustment when a large winning opening illegal winning error and a payout abnormality error of the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment occur at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example of a chart.

The effect control device 300 receives a command for notifying a large winning opening illegal winning error from the game control device 100 at the timing t91, and performs a notification operation by sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the large winning opening illegal winning error by the sound output of the maximum volume, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name at the timing t91.

The effect control device 300 receives a payout abnormality error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t92, and two errors having different priorities overlap. The effect control device 300 restarts the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error that occurred earlier because the priority of the payout abnormality error that occurred later is low. Therefore, the effect control device 300 only outputs the sound of the large winning opening illegal winning error during the partial notification period BT of the sound output period TL1 scheduled from the timing t91, and the large winning opening illegal winning at the timing t92. Stop the error sound output. Then, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error of the sound output period TL1 from the timing t92 to the timing t95 again.

The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the notification of the large winning opening illegal winning error notification at the timing t93, but continues to notify the large winning opening illegal winning error by sound output for the preset sound output period TL1. Then, the notification by the display output is finished. On the other hand, since the effect payout error is occurring, the effect control device 300 starts sound output for the payout abnormality error and continues the display output.

The sound output of the payout abnormality error is an error that outputs the volume linked to the user setting, but since it overlapped with the error having a higher priority until immediately before, the effect control device 300 has the volume linked to the user setting. Disable output and continue sound output at maximum volume. The effect control device 300 can set the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume from the timing t93 to the timing t94, which corresponds to the partial notification period BT. When the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume elapses at the timing t94, the effect control device 300 enables the volume output linked to the user setting.

In addition, in order to secure a period during which at least one set of notification contents (warning sound and message) can be output in the wake of the occurrence of the large winning opening illegal winning error, the gaming machine 10 can cancel the large winning opening illegal winning error. Even if there is, the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error is continued until the sound output period TL1. However, if the sound output period TL1 of the large winning opening illegal winning error has not expired by the timing t94, the effect control device 300 sets the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error as the volume output linked to the user setting. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 can set the sound output of the payout abnormality error to the maximum volume from the timing t93 to the timing t94.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having the lower priority remaining after the error having the higher priority is canceled by overlapping the two errors having different priorities. Further, since the gaming machine 10 outputs the volume linked to the user setting after a predetermined period (for example, a partial notification period BT) has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused by the notification of an error having a low priority.

The effect control device 300 may set the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume to be the same as the partial notification period BT, or may be a period determined according to the magnitude of the partial notification period BT. Further, the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume may be a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the size of the partial notification period BT.

The production control device 300 continued to output the sound of the large winning opening illegal winning error until the sound output period TL1 even if the large winning opening illegal winning error was canceled, but the large winning opening illegal winning error was canceled. The sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error may be stopped at the timing t93, or the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error may be stopped at the timing t94 when the volume output linked to the user setting becomes effective. May be.

The effect control device 300 extended the sound output period (pre-extension) by re-doing the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error in the middle, but extended the sound output period (post-extension) after the sound output period expired. ), Or the middle of the sound output period may be extended (medium extension). For example, the effect control device 300 can extend the middle of the sound output period by inserting a warning sound or the like in the middle of the sound output period.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, when the errors having different priorities are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having a higher priority that has occurred earlier. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel that the errors are duplicated by extending the error notification period of the error having a high priority that has occurred earlier. Such a gaming machine 10 can further reduce the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification.

[Modification 6 of the fourth embodiment]
The sixth modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in that the valid / invalid switching timing of the volume adjustment set by the user is changed when the output period of the error notification sound is extended. ..

When the output period of the error notification sound is extended, the change of the enable / disable switching timing of the volume adjustment set by the user will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 shows a timing showing a reception command, a notification operation, and a timing for switching between valid / invalid volume adjustment when a large winning opening illegal winning error and a payout abnormality error of the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment occur at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example of a chart.

The effect control device 300 receives a command for notifying a large winning opening illegal winning error from the game control device 100 at the timing t101, and performs a notification operation by sound output, lamp output, and display output. The effect control device 300 notifies the large winning opening illegal winning error by the sound output of the maximum volume, the lamp output of the light emitting mode of the maximum brightness, and the display output clearly indicating the error name at the timing t101.

The effect control device 300 receives a payout abnormality error notification command from the game control device 100 at the timing t102, and two errors having different priorities overlap. The effect control device 300 restarts the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error that occurred earlier because the priority of the payout abnormality error that occurred later is low. Therefore, the effect control device 300 only outputs the sound of the large winning opening illegal winning error during the partial notification period BT of the sound output period TL1 scheduled from the timing t101, and the large winning opening illegal winning at the timing t102. Stop the error sound output. Then, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error of the sound output period TL1 from the timing t102 to the timing t105 again.

The effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to end the notification of the large winning opening illegal winning error at the timing t103, and ends the notification operation by the sound output and the display output for the large winning opening illegal winning error. On the other hand, since the effect payout error is occurring, the effect control device 300 starts sound output for the payout abnormality error and continues the display output.

The sound output of the payout abnormality error is an error that outputs the volume linked to the user setting, but since it overlapped with the error having a higher priority until immediately before, the effect control device 300 has the volume linked to the user setting. Disable output and continue sound output at maximum volume. The effect control device 300 can set the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume from the timing t103 to the timing t104, which corresponds to the partial notification period BT. The effect control device 300 enables the volume output linked to the user setting after the elapse of the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having the lower priority remaining after the error having the higher priority is canceled by overlapping the two errors having different priorities. Further, since the gaming machine 10 outputs the volume linked to the user setting after a predetermined period (for example, a partial notification period BT) has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused by the notification of an error having a low priority.

The effect control device 300 may set the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume to be the same as the partial notification period BT, or may be a period determined according to the magnitude of the partial notification period BT. Further, the duration of the sound output at the maximum volume may be a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the size of the partial notification period BT.

The effect control device 300 extended the sound output period (pre-extension) by re-doing the sound output of the large winning opening illegal winning error in the middle, but extended the sound output period (post-extension) after the sound output period expired. ), Or the middle of the sound output period may be extended (medium extension). For example, the effect control device 300 can extend the middle of the sound output period by inserting a warning sound or the like in the middle of the sound output period.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of anomalous notification to the surrounding environment including the game hall staff, while reducing the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification. Further, when the errors having different priorities are duplicated, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the notification effect of the error having a higher priority that has occurred earlier. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel that the errors are duplicated by extending the error notification period of the error having a high priority that has occurred earlier. Such a gaming machine 10 can further reduce the annoyance that the player feels in the error notification.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the first to sixth modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). While the control unit has generated a first error (for example, a front frame opening error) and is notifying the first error, the control unit has a second error (for example, a game frame opening error) having a lower notification priority than the first error. ) Occurs, the first error notification is continued and the first error notification period is extended (see FIGS. 153, 154, and 161).

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit is informing the first error at the first volume when the first error (for example, the large winning opening illegal winning error) in which the first volume (for example, the maximum volume) is set occurs. When a second error (for example, a payout error) that has a lower priority than the first error and a second volume (for example, a user-set volume) is set occurs, the first error due to the first volume occurs. Continue to notify the error. When the first error is cleared before the second error, the control unit limits the change from the first volume to the second volume (disables the volume output linked to the user setting).

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit is informing the first error at the first volume when the first error (for example, the large winning opening illegal winning error) in which the first volume (for example, the maximum volume) is set occurs. When a second error (for example, a payout error) that has a lower priority than the first error and a second volume (for example, a user-set volume) is set occurs, the first error due to the first volume occurs. Continue to notify the error. When the first error is cleared before the second error, the control unit notifies the second error by the first volume.

(4) The control unit of (3) extends the notification period to continue the notification of the first error, and after the notification period elapses, changes the first volume to the second volume to notify the second error. To do.
(5) The control unit of (4) changes the first volume to the second volume after a predetermined period of time elapses, and performs a second error notification.

(6) The control unit of (5) sets a predetermined period according to a period for extending the notification period of the first error (partial notification period BT).
The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, opto-magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM on which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

Variable display With a display that can display games,
A control unit for displaying the variable display game on the display unit including a symbol group composed of a plurality of symbols and an auxiliary symbol group composed of a plurality of auxiliary symbols is provided.
The display unit includes a first information display unit that can display information related to the start memory, which is the execution right of the variable display game, by numbers, and a second information display unit that can display information having a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory. Including and
The control unit
When the specific symbol displayed at the specific time as the symbol is fluctuating, the auxiliary symbol group is changed to the fluctuating state of the auxiliary symbol group without including the auxiliary symbol corresponding to the specific symbol.
While making the first information display unit visible in the auxiliary symbol group fluctuation state, the specific symbol is superimposed on the second information display unit and temporarily stopped.
Pachinko machine.

Images